The URL can be used to link to this page

Report (697) aci 1 (/_‘ 1 1 • JUL 1 8 2007 1 • CITY MYHRE•GROUP architects 1 architecture I interior design I planning 1 PROJECT MANUAL 100% Permit Review Volume 2 of 2 1 Project: City of Tigard Dartmouth Square B tliflet Date AB107 Location: Tigard, Oregon Job Number: 053570 1 Client: 1 Dartmouth Square, LLC Date: August 31 2006 Set Number: 1 1 1 1 1 1 Dartmouth Square 1 Tigard Oregon 1 For: 1 Dartmouth Square LLC 1 • Ali • e tl 7 •u �' r • • ♦ " "'"" � � t c_ ♦ 4 = , 4 . 4 1, _ > ti ' •I ": ..r . _ , _ E . ►' 1 j 'tea f ,_,... .ice -4 \41 i *.. a �_ . „' {. ■• 4 . '4^M�r a ,p, ', it: �. � . ' F .- * _ r it t � r � : ♦ T � �..ti� ,N' 1101"-- mss 'T. ��.r ". �- yr IS 4 I Conceptual Artistic Rendering By: Myhre Group Architects I 1 (Note: This is for information only and i s not contractual) I Job Number: 053570 1 1 ,I 07/06 MGA #053570 i SECTION 000020 — CONSULTANTS I ARCHITECTURE / INTERIORS ,Q ED /1k. Myhre Group Architects ��c. '^ 1700 SW Taylor, Suite 400 Portland, OR 97205 cN •, I Phone: 503 - 236 -6000 •/ / • Fax: 503- 236 -7500 ` 4R 'D' OR IQ � Contact: Brian Frey l>p \' OF � CIVIL ENGINEERING & LANDSCAPE 1 LanPacific 1001 SE Water Ave., Suite 360 II Portland, OR 97214 Phone: 503 -238 -2097 I Fax: 503- 238 -2447 Contact: Erik Esparta — Civil Brian Keefer — Landscape I STRUCTURAL I Froelich Consulting Engineers, Inc. 6969 SW Hampton St. Tigard, OR 97223 i Phone: 503- 624 -7005 Fax: 503 -624 -9770 I Contact: Dean Azimi • , t 1 END OF SECTION 000020 I 1 1 1 r CONSULTANTS 000020 - 1 I MGA# 053570 08/06 I SECTION 000050 - TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 DIVISION AND SECTIONS NUMBER OF PAGES I 000000 COVER 1 000010 CONCEPTUAL ARTISTIC RENDERING 1 000020 CONSULTANTS 1 I 000050 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 OF 2 4 DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPRESSION (DESIGN BUILD) I 1 DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING (DESIGN BUILD) 221113 FACILITY WATER PIPING DISTRIBUTION 44 1 221113 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 24 DMSION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (DESIGN BUILD) 1 DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL (DESIGN BUILD) I N 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY (DESIGN BUILD) O ) ,I DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK I 311000 SITE CLEARING 6 312000 EARTH MOVING 17 312319 DEWATERING 5 315000 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 5 I DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS I 321216 ASPHALT PAVING 14 321313 CONCRETE PAVING 20 321400 UNIT PAVING 18 329200 TURF AND GRASSES 21 I 329300 PLANTS 27 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000050 - 1 MGA# 053570 08/06 1 DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES 1 330500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 15 334100 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 35 334600 SUBDRAINAGE 17 END OF SECTION 000050 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000050 - 2 MGA #053570 08/06 1 SECTION 221113 - FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY 1 A. This Section includes water - distribution piping and related components outside the building for combined water service and fire- service mains. B. Utility- furnished products include water meters that will be furnished to the site, ready for installation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EPDM: Ethylene propylene diene terpolymer rubber. 1 B. LLDPE: Linear, low- density polyethylene plastic. C. PA: Polyamide (nylon) plastic. D. PE: Polyethylene plastic. E. PP: Polypropylene plastic. F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 1 G. RTRF: Reinforced thermosetting resin (fiberglass) fittings. H. RTRP: Reinforced thermosetting resin (fiberglass) pipe. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1 B. Shop Drawings: Detail precast concrete vault assemblies and indicate dimensions, method of field assembly, and components. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring for alarms. 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 1 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 C. Coordination piping s: For i P g in and specialties including relation to other services in same area, drawn to scale. Show piping and specialty sizes and valves, meter and specialty locations, and elevations. D. Field quality- control test reports. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water valves and specialties to include in emergency, 1 operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 Q UALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1 1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of water mains and backflow prevention. 2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable- water - service piping, including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection. 3. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire- suppression water - service piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing. 1 • B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1 D. Comply with ASTM F 645 for selection, design, and installation of thermoplastic water piping. E. Comply with FMG's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for fire- 1 service -main products. F. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve and hydrant supervision for fire- service -main piping for fire suppression. G. NSF Compliance: 1. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic potable- water - service piping. Include marking "NSF- pw" on piping. 2. Comply with NSF 61 for materials for water- service piping and specialties for domestic water. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following: 1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling. B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following: FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 2 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1. Do not remove end neces rotectors unless for inspection; then reinstall for storage. P necessary P 2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew - point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary. C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants if size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. D. Deliver piping with factory- applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe -end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. 1 E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor when storing inside. F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt. G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1 A. Interruption of Existing Water - Distribution Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to - provide temporary water - distribution service according to requirements 1 indicated: 1. Notify Architect and .Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of water - distribution service without Architect's and Owner's written permission. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate connection to water main with utility company. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS 1 A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A), water tube, annealed temper. 1 1. Copper, Solder -Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast - copper -alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought- copper, solder joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought- copper fittings if 1 indicated. 2. Copper, Pressure -Seal Fittings: 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 3 1 MGA #053570 08/06 a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Viega; Plumbing & Heating Systems. .1 c. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Wrought - copper fitting with EPDM 0-ring seal in each end. d. NPS'2 -1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Bronze fitting with stainless -steel grip ring and EPDM 0-ring seal in each end. B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A), water tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper, Solder -Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast - copper -alloy or ASME B 16.22, wrought- copper, solder joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought- copper fittings if indicated. 2. Copper, Pressure -Seal Fittings: a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Viega; Plumbing & Heating Systems. c. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Wrought - copper fitting with EPDM 0-ring seal in each end. d. NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Bronze fitting with stainless -steel grip ring and EPDM 0-ring seal in each end. C. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder - joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if required to match piping. D. Copper Unions: MSS SP -123, cast - copper - alloy, hexagonal -stock body with ball -and- socket, 1 metal -to -metal seating surfaces, and solder joint or threaded ends. 2.2 DUCTILE -IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Mechanical - Joint, Ductile -Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. Mechanical - Joint, Ductile -Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray -iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile -iron compact pattern. 2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray -iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. • 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 4 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile -Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint ush -on -joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. Push -on- Joint, Ductile -Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray -iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile -iron compact pattern. 2. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. C. Grooved- Joint, Ductile -Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with cut, rounded- grooved ends. 1 1. Grooved -End, Ductile -Iron Pipe Appurtenances: a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one 1 of the following: 1) Anvil International, Inc. 1 2) Victaulic Company of America. c. Grooved -End, Ductile -Iron Fittings: • ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable -iron castings or ASTM A , mensions i d. Grooved -End, Ductile - 536 Iron - Piping ductile -iron castings Couplings: with di AWWA C606 for ng duc pipe. tile -iron -pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and nuts. D. Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125, cast iron. 2.3 PE PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PE, ASTM Pipe: ASTM D 2239, SIDR No. 5.3, 7, or 9; with PE compound number required to 1 give pressure rating not less than 160 psig (1100 kPa). 1. Insert Fittings for PE Pipe: ASTM D 2609, made of PA, PP, or PVC with serrated male insert ends matching inside of pipe. Include bands or crimp rings. 2. Molded PE Fittings: ASTM D 3350, PE resin, socket- or butt- fusion type, made to match PE pipe dimensions and class. B. PE, AWWA Pipe: AWWA C906, DR No. 7.3, 9, or 9.3; with PE compound number required to give pressure rating not less than 160 psig (1100 kPa). 1. PE, AWWA Fittings: . AWWA C906, socket- or butt- fusion type, with DR number matching pipe and PE compound number required to give pressure rating not less than 160 psig (1100 kPa). C. PE, Fire- Service Pipe: ASTM F 714, AWWA C906, or equivalent for PE water pipe; FMG approved, with minimum thickness equivalent to FMG Class 150. 1 1. Molded PE Fittings: ASTM D 3350, PE resin, socket- or butt- fusion type, made to match PE pipe dimensions and class. 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 5 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2.4 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PVC, Schedule 40 Pipe: ASTM D 1785. 1 1. PVC, Schedule 40 Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2466. B. PVC, Schedule 80 Pipe: ASTM D 1785. 1 1. PVC, Schedule 80 Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2467. 2. PVC, Schedule 80 Threaded Fittings: ASTM D 2464. C. PVC, AWWA Pipe: AWWA C900, Class 150, with bell end with gasket, and with spigot end. 1. Comply with UL 1285 for fire- service mains if indicated. 2. PVC Fabricated Fittings: AWWA C900, Class 150, with bell -and- spigot or double -bell ends. Include elastomeric gasket in each bell. 3. PVC Molded Fittings: AWWA C907, Class 150, with bell- and - spigot or double -bell ends. Include elastomeric gasket in each bell. 4. Push -on- Joint, Ductile -Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray -iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile -iron compact pattern. a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. 5. Mechanical - Joint, Ductile -Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray -iron standard 1 pattern or AWWA C153, ductile -iron compact pattern. a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray -iron glands, rubber 1 gaskets, and steel bolts. 2.5 FIBERGLASS PIPE AND FITTINGS A. AWWA RTRP: AWWA C950, Class 150, Class 200, and Class 250, Type I or II, Grade 1, epoxy or Grade 2, polyester, with bell -and- spigot ends for bonded with gasket or seal for gasketed joints. Liner is optional, unless otherwise indicated. Include FMG approval if used for fire- service mains. 1. RTRF: AWWA C950, similar to pipe in material, pressure class, and joining method. B. UL RTRP: UL 1713, Class 150, Class 200, and Class 250, with bell -and- spigot ends with gasket or seal for gasketed joints. Liner is optional, unless otherwise indicated. 1. RTRF: Similar to pipe in material, pressure class, and joining method. 1 2.6 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS A. Ductile -Iron Rigid Expansion Joints: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 1 offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 6 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Subject P q �P P Y following: a. EBAA Iron, Inc. b. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company. 3. Description: Three- piece, ductile -iron assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve with gaskets and restrained -type, ductile -iron, bell -and- spigot end sections . complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion • indicated. Include AWWA C111, ductile -iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. a. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum. 1 b. Expansion Required: 1/8 inches (3.175mm). B. Ductile -Iron Flexible Expansion Joints: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. EBAA Iron, Inc. b. Hays Fluid Controls; a division of ROMAC Industries Inc. c. Star Pipe Products. 3. Description: Compound, ductile -iron fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include two gasketed ball joint sections and one or more gasketed sleeve sections. Assemble components for offset and expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111, ductile -iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. 1 a. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum. b. Offset: per manufacture c. Expansion Required: per manufacture C. Ductile -Iron Deflection Fittings: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. EBAA Iron, Inc. 3. Description: Compound, ductile -iron coupling fitting with sleeve and 1 or 2 flexing sections for up to 15- degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile -iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 7 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 a. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum. g P g( ) 2.7 . JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for commonly used joining materials. B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series. C. Bonding Adhesive for Fiberglass Piping: As recommended by fiberglass piping manufacturer. D. Plastic Pipe -Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 2.8 PIPING SPECIALTIES . 1. A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined. B. Tubular- Sleeve Pipe Couplings: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing. 1 b. Dresser, Inc.; Dresser Piping Specialties. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Div. d. Hays Fluid Controls; a division of ROMAC Industries Inc. e. JCM Industries. f. Smith - Blair, Inc. g. Viking Johnson. 3. Description: Metal, bolted, sleeve -type, reducing or transition coupling, with center sleeve, gaskets, end rings, and bolt fasteners and with ends of same sizes as piping to be joined. 1 a. Standard: AWWA C219. b. Center - Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard. c. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber. d. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum. e. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion - resistant coating or material. C. Split- Sleeve Pipe Couplings: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 1 offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 8 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Subject P q P following: a. Victaulic Depend- O -Lok. • 3. Description: Metal, bolted, split - sleeve -type, reducing or transition coupling with sealing pad and closure plates, 0-ring gaskets, and bolt fasteners. a. Standard: AWWA C219. b. Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard. c. Sleeve Dimensions: Of thickness and width required to provide pressure rating. d. Gasket Material: O -rings made of EPDM rubber, unless otherwise indicated. e. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum. f. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion - resistant coating or material. D. Flexible Connectors: 1. Nonferrous -Metal Piping: Bronze hose covered with bronze wire braid; with copper - tube, pressure -type, solder joint ends or bronze flanged ends brazed to hose. 2. Ferrous -Metal Piping: Stainless -steel hose covered with stainless -steel wire braid; with ASME B1.20.1, threaded steel pipe nipples or ASME B16.5, steel pipe flanges welded to ' hose. E. Dielectric Fittings: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, or plain end types; and matching piping system materials. 1. Dielectric Unions: Factory- fabricated union assembly, designed for 250 -psig (1725 -kPa) minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C). Include insulating material that isolates dissimilar metals and ends with inside threads according to ASME B1.20.1. 2. Dielectric Flanges: Factory- fabricated companion -flange assembly, for 150- or 300 -psig (1035- or 2070 -kPa) minimum working pressure to suit system pressures. 3. Dielectric -Flange Insulation Kits: Field- assembled companion -flange assembly, full -face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. a. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150- or 300 -psig (1035- or 2070 -kPa) minimum working pressure to suit system pressures. 4. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized -steel couplings with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with threaded ends and 300 -psig (2070 -kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C). 5. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipples with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types, and 300 -psig (2070- kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C). 2.9 CORROSION- PROTECTION PIPING ENCASEMENT A. Encasement for Underground Metal Piping: 1. Standards: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 9 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2. Form: Sheet or tube. 3. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008 -inch (0.20 -mm) minimum thickness. 4. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008 -inch (0.20 -mm) minimum thickness, or high - density, 1 crosslaminated PE film of 0.004 -inch (0.10 -mm) minimum thickness. 5. Material: High- density, crosslaminated PE film of 0.004 -inch (0.10 -mm) minimum thickness. 6. Color: Black. 2.10 GATE VALVES 1 A. AWWA, Cast -Iron Gate Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufactureis offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. American AVK Co.; Valves & Fittings Div. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. 1 c. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. f. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). g. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. h. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div. i. McWane, Inc.; Tyler Pipe Div.; Utilities Div. j. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. k. NIBCO INC. 1. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company. 4. Nonrising -Stem, Metal- Seated Gate Valves: a. Description: Gray- or ductile -iron body and bonnet; with cast -iron or bronze double -disc gate, bronze gate rings, bronze stem, and stem nut. 1) Standard: AWWA C500. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 3) End Connections: Mechanical joint. 4) Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550. 1 5. Nonrising -Stem, Resilient- Seated Gate Valves: a. Description: Gray- or ductile -iron body and bonnet; with bronze or gray- or ductile -iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut. 1) Standard: AWWA C509. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 10 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 3) End Connections: Mechanical J joint. 4) Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550. 6. Nonrising -Stem, High - Pressure, Resilient- Seated Gate Valves: a. Description: Ductile -iron body and bonnet; with bronze or ductile -iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut. 1) Standard: AWWA C509. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa). 3) End Connections: Push on or mechanical joint. 4) Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550. 7. OS &Y, Rising -Stem, Metal- Seated Gate Valves: a. Description: Cast- or ductile -iron body and bonnet, with cast -iron double disc, bronze disc and seat rings, and bronze stem. 1 1) Standard: AWWA C500. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 3) End Connections: Flanged. 1 8. OS &Y, Rising -Stem, Resilient- Seated Gate Valves: a. Description: Cast- or ductile -iron body and bonnet, with bronze or gray- or ductile -iron gate, resilient seats, and bronze stem. 1) Standard: AWWA C509. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 3) End Connections: Flanged. B. UL/FMG, Cast -Iron Gate Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. d. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). 1 e. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. f. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div. g. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. I h. NIBCO INC. i. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company. 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 11 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 4. UL/FMG Nonrisin g -Stem Gate Valves: a. Description: Iron body and bonnet with flange for indicator post, bronze seating material, and inside screw. 1) Standards: UL 262 and FMG approved. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa). 3) End Connections: Flanged. 5. OS &Y, Rising -Stem Gate Valves: a. Description: Iron body and bonnet and bronze seating material. 1) Standards: UL 262 and FMG approved. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa). 3) End Connections: Flanged. C. Bronze Gate Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 1 offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. d. Hammond Valve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCOINC. g. Red -White Valve Corporation. 4. OS &Y, Rising -Stem Gate Valves: 1 a. Description: Bronze body and bonnet and bronze stem. 1) Standards: UL 262 and FMG approved. 1 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa). 3) End Connections: Threaded. 5. Nonrising -Stem Gate Valves: a. Description: Class 125, Type 1, bronze with solid wedge, threaded ends, and malleable -iron handwheel. 1) Standard: MSS SP -80. 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 12 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2.11 GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES 1 A. Tapping- Sleeve Assemblies: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1 a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. b. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. c. Flowserve. d. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). e. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. f. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div. g. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. h. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company. 1 4. Description: Sleeve and valve compatible with drilling machine. a. Standard: MSS SP -60. b. Tapping Sleeve: Cast- or ductile -iron or stainless - steel, two -piece bolted sleeve with flanged outlet for new branch connection. Include sleeve matching size and type of pipe material being tapped and with recessed flange for branch valve. c. Valve: AWWA, cast -iron, nonrising -stem, metal resilient- seated gate valve with 1 one raised face flange mating tapping- sleeve flange. B. Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast -iron valve boxes. Include top section, adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over valve and with a barrel approximately 5 inches (125 mm) in diameter. 1. Operating Wrenches: Steel, tee -handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut. C. Indicator Posts: UL 789, FMG- approved, vertical -type, cast -iron body with operating wrench, extension rod, and adjustable cast -iron barrel of length required for depth of burial of valve. 1 2.12 CHECK VALVES A. AWWA Check Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 13 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 3. Basis- of -Desi gn Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. American AVK Co.; Valves & Fittings Div. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. c. APCO Williamette; Valve and Primer Corporation. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. f. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). g. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. h. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div. i. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. j. NIBCO INC. 1 k. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 4. Description: Swing -check type with resilient seat. Include interior coating according to AWWA C550 and ends to match piping. a. Standard: AWWA C508. b. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa). B. UL/FMG, Check Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. �. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. c. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. d. Kidde Fire Fighting. e. MATCO - NORCA, Inc. f. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). g: McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. h. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. i. NIBCO INC. j. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. k. Tyco Fire & Building Products. 1. United Brass Works, Inc. m. Victaulic Company of America. n. Viking Corporation. o. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 1 4. Description: Swing -check type with pressure rating; rubber -face checks, unless otherwise indicated; and ends matching piping. a. Standards: UL 312 and FMG approved. 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 14 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 b. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa). P g 2.13 DETECTOR CHECK VALVES A. Detector Check Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Regulator Co. b. Badger Meter, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. 1 d. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. e. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. f. Mueller Co.; Hersey Meters. g. Victaulic Company of America. 1 h. Viking Corporation. i. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 4. Description: Galvanized cast -iron body, bolted cover with air -bleed device for access to internal parts, and flanged ends. Include one -piece bronze disc with bronze bushings, pivot, and replaceable seat. Include threaded bypass taps in inlet and outlet for bypass meter connection. Set valve to allow minimal water flow through bypass meter when major water flow is required. a. Standards: UL 312 and FMG approved. b. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa). c. Water Meter: AWWA C700, disc type, at least one - fourth size of detector check valve. Include meter, bypass piping, gate valves, check valve, and connections to 1 detector check valve. 5. Description: Iron body, corrosion - resistant clapper ring and seat ring material, flanged 1 ends, with connections for bypass and installation of water meter. a. Standards: UL 312 and FMG approved. b. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa). 2.14 BUTTERFLY VALVES 1 A. AWWA Butterfly Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 15 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Subject P following: 3. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings comparable product by one of the following: a. DeZURIK/Copes- Vulcan; a unit of SPX Corporation. b. Milliken Valve Company. c. Mosser Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc. d. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. e. Pratt, Henry Company. f. Val -Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp. 4. Description: Rubber seated. 1 a. Standard: AWWA C504. b. Body: Cast or ductile iron. c. Body Type: Wafer or flanged. d. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). B. UL Butterfly Valves: 1 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, 1 the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. 1 b. Milwaukee Valve Company. - c. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. d. NIBCO INC. e. Pratt, Henry Company. 4. Description: Metal on resilient material seating. 1 a. Standards: UL 1091 and FMG approved. b. Body: Cast or ductile iron. c. Body Type: Wafer or flanged. d. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa). 2.15 PLUG VALVES A. Plug Valves: 1 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 16 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Subject P q P P following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. DeZURIK/Copes- Vulcan; a unit of SPX Corporation. b. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc. c. Milliken Valve Company. d. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div. e. Pratt, Henry Company. f. Val -Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp. 1 4. Description: Resilient- seated eccentric. a. Standard: MSS SP -108. b. Body: Cast iron. c. Pressure Rating: 175 -psig (1207 -kPa) minimum CWP. d. Seat Material: Suitable for potable -water service. 2.16 CORPORATION VALVES AND CURB VALVES 1 A. Manufacturers: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 1 following: a. Amcast Industrial Corporation; Lee Brass Co. b. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Div. c. Jones, James Company. d. Master Meter, Inc. e. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. ' f. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. g. Red Hed Manufacturing & Supply. B. Service- Saddle Assemblies: Comply with AWWA C800. Include saddle and valve compatible with tapping machine. 1. Service Saddle: Copper alloy with seal and AWWA C800, threaded outlet for corporation valve. 2. Corporation Valve: Bronze body and ground -key plug, with AWWA C800, threaded inlet and outlet matching service piping material. ' 3. Manifold: Copper fitting with two to four inlets as required, with ends matching corporation valves and outlet matching service piping material. C. Curb Valves: Comply with AWWA C800. Include bronze body, ground -key plug or ball, and wide tee head, with inlet and outlet matching service piping material. 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 17 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 D. Service Boxes for Curb Valves: Similar to AWWA M44 requirements for cast -iron valve boxes. Include cast -iron telescoping top section of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over curb valve and with a barrel approximately 3 inches (75 mm) in diameter. 1. Shutoff Rods: Steel, tee -handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and slotted end matching curb valve. 2.17 WATER METERS 1 A. Water meters will be furnished by utility company. B. Manufacturers: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. AMCO Water Metering Systems. b. Badger Meter, Inc. c. Carlon Meter. d. Hays Fluid Controls; a division of ROMAC Industries Inc. e. McCrometer. f. Mueller Co.; Hersey Meters. g. Neptune Technology Group Inc. I - h. Sensus Metering Systems. C. Displacement -Type Water Meters: 1 1. Description: With bronze main case. a. Standard: AWWA C700. 1 b. Registration: Flow m gallons (liters). D. Turbine -Type Water Meters: 1 1. Description: a. Standard: AWWA C701. 111 b. Registration: Flow in gallons (liters). E. Compound -Type Water Meters: 1 1. Description: a. Standard: AWWA C702. b. Registration: Flow in gallons (liters). FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 18 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 F. Remote Registration System: 1 1. Description: Utility company standard; direct - reading type. Include meter modified with signal- transmitting assembly, low - voltage connecting wiring, and remote register assembly. a. Standard: AWWA C706. b. Registration: Flow in gallons (liters). G. Remote Registration System: 1. Description: Utility company standard; encoder type. Include meter modified with signal- transmitting assembly, low - voltage connecting wiring, and remote register assembly. a. Standard: AWWA C707. b. Registration: Flow in gallons (liters). c. Data- Acquisition Units: Comply with utility company requirements for type and quantity. d. Visible Display Units: Comply with utility company requirements for type and quantity. ' 2.18 DETECTOR -TYPE WATER METERS A. Detector -Type Water Meters: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1 a. Badger Meter, Inc. b. Mueller Co.; Hersey Meters. c. Neptune Technology Group Inc. 1 d. Sensus Metering Systems. B. Description: Main line, proportional meter with second meter on bypass. Register flow in gallons (liters). 1. Standards: AWWA C703, UL listed, and FMG approved. 1 2. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 3. Bypass Meter: AWWA C701, turbine or AWWA C702, compound -type, bronze case. a. Size: At least one -half nominal size of main -line meter. C. Description: Main -line turbine meter with strainer and second meter on bypass. Register flow in gallons (liters). 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 19 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1. Standards: AWWA C703 UL listed, and FMG approved. 2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa). 3. Bypass Meter: AWWA C701, turbine -type, bronze case. 1 a. Size: At least NPS 2 (DN 50). D. Remote Registration System: 1. Description: Utility company standard; direct- reading type. Include meter modified with signal- transmitting assembly, low - voltage connecting wiring, and remote register assembly. a. Standard: AWWA C706. b. Registration: Flow in gallons (liters) E. Remote Registration System: 1 1. Description: Utility company standard; encoder type. Include meter modified with signal- transmitting assembly, low - voltage connecting wiring, and remote register assembly. a. Standard: AWWA C707. b. Registration: Flow in gallons (liters). 1 c. Data - Acquisition Units: Comply with utility company requirements for type and quantity. d. Visible Display Units: Comply with utility company requirements for type and quantity. 2.19 PRESSURE - REDUCING VALVES 1 A. Water Regulators: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Cash Acme; a division of The Reliance Worldwide Corporation. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. 1 c. Honeywell Water Controls. d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Div. 1 4. Standard: ASSE 1003. 5. Pressure Rating: Initial pressure of 150 psig (1035 kPa). 6. Size: per TVWD 7. Design Flow Rate: per TVWD 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 20 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 8. Design Inlet Pressure: per TVWD � P 9. Design Outlet Pressure Setting: per TVWD 10. Body: Bronze with chrome- plated fmish for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2 -1/2 and NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80). 11. Valves for Booster Heater Water Supply: Include integral bypass. 12. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2 -1/2 and NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80). 1 B. Water Control Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers ' offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. CLA -VAL Automatic Control Valves. b. Flomatic Corporation. c. OCV Control Valves. d. Watts Regulator Co.; Ames Fluid Control Systems. e. Watts Regulator Co.; Watts ACV Division. f. Zuni Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Div. 4. Description: Pilot- operation, diaphragm -type, single- seated main water control valve with AWWA C550 or FDA - approved, interior epoxy coating. Include small pilot control 1 valve, restrictor device, specialty fittings, and sensor piping. a. Pressure Rating: Initial pressure of 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum. ' b. Main Valve Body: Cast- or ductile -iron body with AWWA C550 or FDA - approved, interior epoxy coating; or stainless -steel body. 1) Size: per TVWD 1 2) Pattern: Globe -valve design. 3) Trim: Stainless steel. c. Design Flow Rate: per TVWD d. Design Inlet Pressure: per TVWD e. Design Outlet Pressure Setting: TVWD ' f. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2- 1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 2.20 RELIEF VALVES A. Air- Release Valves: 1 ` � 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 21 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Crispin- Multiplex Manufacturing Co. b. GA Industries, Inc. c. Val -Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp. 4. Description: Hydromechanical device to automatically release accumulated air. 1 a. Standard: AWWA C512. b. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa). c. Body Material: Cast iron. d. Trim Material: Stainless steel, brass, or bronze. e. Water Inlet Size: (per plan) NPS (DN). f. Air Outlet Size: (per plan) NPS (DN). g. Orifice Size: (per plan) inch (mm). h. Design Air- Release Capacity: (per plan) cfm (L /s) at (per plans) psig (kPa) 1 pipeline pressure. B. AirNacuum Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product 1 indicated on Drawings; or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Crispin- Multiplex Manufacturing Co. b. GA Industries, Inc. c. Val -Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp. 4. Description: Direct - acting, float- operated, hydromechanical device with large orifice to automatically release accumulated air or to admit air during filling of piping. a. Standard: AWWA C512. b. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa). c. Body Material: Cast iron. d. Trim Material: Stainless steel, brass, or bronze. e. Inlet and Outlet Size: (per plan) NPS (DN). f. Orifice Size: (per plan) inch (mm). g. Design Air Capacity: (per plan) cfm (L /s)> at (per plan) psig (kPa) differential pressure. 1 C. Combination Air Valves: 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 22 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers Subject P q offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings; or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Crispin- Multiplex Manufacturing Co. b. GA Industries, Inc. c. Val -Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp. ' d. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 4. Description: Float- operated, hydromechanical device to automatically release accumulated air or to admit air. a. Standard: AWWA C512. b. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa). c. Body Material: Cast iron. d. Trim Material: Stainless steel, brass, or bronze. e. Inlet and Outlet Size: (per plan) NPS (DN). f. Orifice Size: (per plan) inch (mm). g. Design Air Capacity: (per plan) cfm (L /s)> at (per plan) psig (kPa) differential pressure. 2.21 VACUUM BREAKERS A. Pressure Vacuum Breaker Assembly: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers ' offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings; or a comparable product by one of the following: ' a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Regulator Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Toro Co. (The); Irrigation Division. f. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Div. 4. Standard: ASSE 1020. 5. Operation: Continuous - pressure applications. 6. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 7. Size: (per plan) NPS (DN). 8. Design Flow Rate: (per plan) gpm (L /s). 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 23 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 9. Selected Unit Flow Range Limits: <Insert gpm (L /s).> 10. Pressure Loss at Design Flow Rate: <Insert psig (kPa).> 11. Accessories: Ball valves on inlet and outlet. 1 2.22 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 1 A. Reduced - Pressure - Principle Backflow Preventers: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 1 offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings; or a comparable product by one of the following: 1 a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Regulator Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Div. 1 4. Standard: ASSE 1013 or AWWA C511. 5. Operation: Continuous - pressure applications. 6. Pressure Loss: 12 psig (83 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 7. Size: (per plan) NPS (DN). 8. Design Flow Rate: (per plan) gpm (L /s). 9. Selected Unit Flow Range Limits: (per plan)gpm (L /s). 10. Pressure Loss at Design Flow Rate: (per plan)psig (kPa) for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; (per plan)psig (kPa)> for NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 11. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, steel with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, stainless steel for NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 12. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 13. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through and vertical inlet, horizontal center section, and vertical outlet flow. 14. Accessories: a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; OS &Y gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and larger. b. Air -Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow preventer connection. B. Double- Check, Backflow- Prevention Assemblies: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 24 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Subject P following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings; or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Regulator Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Div. 4. Standard: ASSE 1015 or AWWA C510. 5. Operation: Continuous - pressure applications, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 7. Size: (per plan) NPS (DN). 8. Design Flow Rate: (per plan) gpm (L /s). 9. Selected Unit Flow Range Limits: (per plan) gpm (L /s). 10. Pressure Loss at Design Flow Rate: (per plan) psig (kPa) for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; (per plan) psig (kPa) for NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 11. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; [cast iron with interior lining complying ' with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, steel with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, stainless steel for NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 12. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and larger. ' 13. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow. 14. Accessories: Ball valves with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; OS &Y gate valves with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) 1 and larger. C. Reduced - Pressure- Detector, Fire- Protection Backflow Preventer Assemblies: 1 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, ' the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product 1 indicated on Drawings; or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Regulator Co. ' b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Div. 4. Standards: ASSE 1047 and UL listed or FMG approved. 5. Operation: Continuous - pressure applications. 6. Pressure Loss: 12 psig (83 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 7. Size: (per plan) NPS (DN). 8. Design Flow Rate: (per plan) gpm (L /s). 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 25 1 MGA #053570 08/06 9. Selected Unit Flow (P Range Limits: (per plan) gpm (L /s). 10. Pressure Loss at Design Flow Rate: (per plan) psig (kPa). 11. Body: Cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, Steel with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, Stainless steel. 12. End Connections: Flanged. 13. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through, vertical inlet, horizontal center section, and vertical outlet, vertical flow. 14. Accessories: a. Valves: UL 262, FMG- approved, OS &Y gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet. - b. Air -Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow preventer connection. c. Bypass: With displacement -type water meter, shutoff valves, and reduced pressure backflow preventer. D. Double- Check, Detector - Assembly Backflow Preventers: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings; or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Regulator Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Div. 4. Standards: ASSE 1048 and UL listed or FMG approved. 1 5. Operation: Continuous - pressure applications. 6. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 7. Size: (per plan) NPS (DN). 8. Design Flow Rate: (per plan) gpm (L /s). 9. Selected Unit Flow Range Limits: (per plan) gpm (L /s). 10. Pressure Loss at Design Flow Rate: (per plan) psig (kPa). 11. Body: Cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, Steel with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, Stainless steel. 12. End Connections: Flanged. 13. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through, vertical inlet, horizontal center section, and vertical outlet, vertical flow. 14. Accessories: a. Valves: UL 262, FMG- approved, OS &Y gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet. b. Bypass: With displacement -type water meter, shutoff valves, and reduced- pressure backflow preventer. 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 26 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 E. Backflow Preventer Test Kits: 1 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings; or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. c. Flomatic Corporation. d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Div. 1 4. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test - procedure instructions. 2.23 WATER METER BOXES 1 A. Description: Cast -iron body and cover for disc -type water meter, with lettering "WATER METER" in cover; and with slotted, open -bottom base section of length to fit over service piping. ' 1. Option: Base section may be cast -iron, PVC, clay, or other pipe. B. Description: Cast -iron body and double cover for disc -type water meter, with lettering "WATER METER" in top cover; and with separate inner cover; air space between covers; and slotted, open -bottom base section of length to fit over service piping. 1 C. Description: Polymer- concrete body and cover for disc -type water meter, with lettering "WATER" in cover; and with slotted, open -bottom base section of length to fit over service piping. Include vertical and lateral design loadings of 15,0001b minimum over 10 by 10 inches 1 (6800 kg minimum over 254 by 254 mm) square. ' 2.24 CONCRETE VAULTS A. Description: Precast, reinforced- concrete vault, designed for A -16 load designation according ' to ASTM C 857 and made according to ASTM C 858. 1. Ladder: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel or polyethylene- encased steel steps. 2. Manhole: ASTM A 48/A 48M Class No. 35A minimum tensile strength, gray -iron traffic 1 frame and cover. a. Dimension: 24 -inch (610 -mm) minimum diameter, unless otherwise indicated. 1 3. Manhole: ASTM A 536, Grade 60- 40 -18, ductile -iron traffic frame and cover. a. Dimension: 24 -inch- (610 -mm -) minimum diameter, unless otherwise indicated. FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 27 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 4. Drain: ASME A112.6.3, cast-iron floor drain with outlet of size indicated. Include body anchor flange, light -duty cast -iron grate, bottom outlet, and integral or field - installed bronze ball or clapper -type backwater valve. 1 2.25 PROTECTIVE ENCLOSURES A. Freeze - Protection Enclosures:' 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 11 offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings; or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Aqua Shield. b. BF Products, Inc. c. DekoRRa Products. d. Dunco Manufacturing, Inc. e. G &C Enclosures. f. Hot Box, Inc. 1 g. HydroCowl, Inc. h. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 4. Description: Insulated enclosure designed to protect aboveground water piping, equipment, or specialties from freezing and damage, with heat source to maintain minimum internal temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) when external temperatures reach as low as minus 34 deg F (minus 36 deg C). a. Standard: ASSE 1060. b. Class I: For equipment or devices other than pressure or atmospheric vacuum 1 breakers. c. Class I -V: For pressure or atmospheric vacuum breaker equipment or devices. Include dram opening in housing. 1 1) Housing: Reinforced - aluminum or — fiberglass construction. a) Size: Of dimensions indicated, but not less than those required for 1 access and service of protected unit. b) Drain opening for units with drain connection. c) Access doors with locking devices. d) Insulation inside housing. e) Anchoring devices for attaching housing to concrete base. 2) Electric heating cable or heater with self - limiting temperature control. B. Weather - Resistant Enclosures: 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 28 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1. Available Manufacturers: compliance Subject to with requirements, manufacturers Subject P q offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: ' 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings; or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Aqua Shield. b. BF Products, Inc. c. DekoRRa Products. d. Dunco Manufacturing, Inc. e. G &C Enclosures. f. Hot Box, Inc. g. HydroCowl, Inc. 1 h. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 4. Description: Uninsulated enclosure designed to protect aboveground water piping, 1 equipment, or specialties from weather and damage. a. Standard: ASSE 1060. b. Class III: For equipment or devices other than pressure or atmospheric vacuum breakers. c. Class III -V: For pressure or atmospheric vacuum breaker equipment or devices. Include drain opening m housing. ' 1) Housing: Reinforced - aluminum or — fiberglass construction. a) Size: Of dimensions indicated, but not less than those required for access and service of protected unit. b) Drain opening for units with drain connection. ' c) Access doors with locking devices. d) Anchoring devices for attaching housing to concrete base. C. Expanded -Metal Enclosures: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, ' the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: ' 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings; or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Backflow Prevention Device InnClosures, Inc. b. BF Products, Inc. c. Cross Brothers, Inc. d. Le Meur Welding & Manufacturing Co. 4. Description: Enclosure designed to protect aboveground water piping, equipment, or specialties from damage. 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 29 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 a. Material: ASTM F 1267, expanded metal side and top panels, of weight and with reinforcement of same metal at edges as required for rigidity. b. Type: Type I, expanded II, expanded and flattened. c. Class: Class 1, uncoated carbon steel 2, hot -dip, zinc- coated carbon steel 3, corrosion- resisting steel. d. Finish: Manufacturer's enamel paint. e. Size: Of dimensions indicated, but not less than those required for access and service of protected unit. f. Locking device. g. Lugs or devices for securing enclosure to base. D. Enclosure Bases: 1. Description: 4 -inch- (100 -mm -), (6 -inch- (150-nun-) minimum thickness precast concrete, of dimensions required to extend at least 6 inches (150 mm) beyond edges of enclosure housings. Include openings for piping. 1 2.26 FIRE HYDRANTS A. Dry- Barrel Fire Hydrants: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 1 offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings; or a comparable product by one of the following: a. American AVK Co.; Valves & Fittings Div. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. c. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. d. American Foundry Group, Inc. e. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. f. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). 111 g. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. h. McWane, Inc.; M & 11 Valve Company Div. i. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. j. Troy Valve; a division of Penn -Troy Manufacturing, Inc. k. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company. 4. Description: Freestanding, with one NPS 4 -1/2 (DN 115) and two NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) 1 outlets, 5 -1/4 -inch (133 -mm) main valve, drain valve, and NPS 6 (DN 150) mechanical - joint inlet. Include interior coating according to AWWA C550. Hydrant shall have cast - iron body, compression -type valve opening against pressure and closing with pressure. 1 a. Standard: AWWA C502. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum 250 psig (1725 kPa). 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 30 1 MGA #053570 08/06 5. Description: Freestanding, one NPS 4 -1/2 (DN 115) and two NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65 P g, ( ) ( 65) outlets, 5 -1/4 -inch (133 -mm) main valve, drain valve, and NPS 6 (DN 150) mechanical- joint inlet. Hydrant shall have cast -iron body, compression -type valve opening against pressure and closing with pressure. ' a. Standards: UL 246, FMG approved. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum 250 psig (1725 kPa). c. Outlet Threads: NFPA 1963, with external hose thread used by local fire department. Include cast -iron caps with steel chains. d. Operating and Cap Nuts: Pentagon, 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) point to flat. e. Direction of Opening: Open hydrant valve by turning operating nut to left or 1 counterclockwise. f. Exterior Finish: Red alkyd -gloss enamel paint, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wet - Barrel Fire Hydrants: 1 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, ' the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings; or a comparable product by one of the following: a. American AVK Co.; Valves & Fittings Div. 1 b. Jones, James Company. c. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Corona). d. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa). e. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div.. 4. Description: Freestanding, with one NPS 4 -1/2 (DN 115) and two NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) ' outlets, NPS 6 (DN 150) threaded or flanged inlet, and base section with NPS 6 (DN 150) mechanical joint inlet. Include interior coating according to AWWA C550. a. Standard: AWWA C503. 1 b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum. 5. Description: Freestanding, with one NPS 4 -1/2 (DN 115) and two NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) ' outlets, NPS 6 (DN 150) threaded or flanged inlet, and base section with NPS 6 (DN 150) mechanical joint inlet. a. Standards: UL 246 and FMG approved. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum. c. Outlet Threads: NFPA 1963, with external hose thread used by local fire department. Include cast -iron caps with steel chains. d. Operating and Cap Nuts: Pentagon, 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) point to flat. e. Direction of Opening: Open hydrant valves by turning operating nut to left or counterclockwise. 1 f. Exterior Finish: Red alkyd -gloss enamel paint, unless otherwise indicated. 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 31 1 • 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2.27 FLUSHING HYDRANTS A. Post -Type Flushing Hydrants: 1 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings; or a comparable product by one of the following: a. GIL Industries, Inc. b. Kupferle Foundry Co. (The). c. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. 4. Description: Nonfreeze and drainable, of length required for shutoff valve installation 1 below frost line. a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum. 1 b. Outlet: One, with horizontal discharge. c. Hose Thread: NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65), with NFPA 1963 external hose thread for use by local fire department, and with cast -iron cap with brass chain. d. Barrel: Cast -iron or steel pipe with breakaway feature. e. Valve: Bronze body with bronze -ball or plunger closure, and automatic draining. f. Security: Locking device for padlock. g. Exterior Finish: Red alkyd -gloss enamel paint, unless otherwise indicated. h. Inlet: NPS 2 (DN 50) minimum. i. Operating Wrench: One for each unit. B. Ground -Type Flushing Hydrants: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 1 offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings; or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Kupferle Foundry Co. (The). b. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. 4. Description: Nonfreeze and drainable, of length required for shutoff valve installation below frost line. a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum. b. Outlet: One, with vertical, angle discharge. c. Hose Thread: NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65), with NFPA 1963 extemal hose thread for use by local fire department, and with cast -iron cap with brass chain. d. Barrel: Cast -iron or steel pipe. 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 32 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 e. Valve: Bronze body plunger with bronze -ball or lun er closure, and automatic draining. f. Inlet: NPS 2 (DN 50) minimum. g. Hydrant Box: Cast iron with cover, for ground mounting. h. Operating Wrench: One for each unit. 1 C. Post -Type Sampling Station: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers ' offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings; or a comparable product by one of the following: 1 a. GIL Industries, Inc. b. Kupferle Foundry Co. (The). 4. Description: Nonfreeze and drainable, of length required for shutoff valve installation below frost line. a. Pressure Rating: 100 psig (690 kPa) minimum. ' b. Sampling Outlet: One unthreaded nozzle with handle. c. Valve: Bronze body with bronze -ball or plunger closure. Include operating handle. ' d. Drain: Tubing with separate manual vacuum pump. e. Inlet: NPS 3/4 (DN 20) minimum. f. Housing: Weatherproof material with locking device. Include anchor device. 1 g. Operating Wrench: One for each unit. 2.28 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS A. Fire Department Connections: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: ' 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings; or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc. b. Fire End & Croker Corporation. ' c. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. d. Kidde Fire Fighting. e. Potter Roemer. 1 f. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 33 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 4. Description: Freestanding, with cast - bronze body, thread inlets according to NFPA 1963 P g and matching local fire department hose threads, and threaded bottom outlet. Include lugged caps, gaskets, and chains; lugged swivel connection and drop clapper for each hose - connection inlet; 18 -inch- (460 -mm -) high brass sleeve; and round escutcheon plate. a. Standard: UL 405. b. Connections: Two NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) inlets and one NPS 4 (DN 100), NPS 6 (DN 150) outlet. c. Connections: Three or Four NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) inlets and one NPS 6 (DN 150) I outlet. d. Connections: Six NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) inlets and one NPS 6 (DN 150), NPS 8 (DN 200) outlet. e.. Inlet Alignment: Inline, Horizontal Square. f. Finish Including Sleeve: Polished chrome- plated or Rough chrome- plated or Polished bronze — per plan. g. Escutcheon Plate Marking: "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE." 1 2.29 ALARM DEVICES A. Alarm Devices, General: UL 753 and FMG approved, of types and sizes to mate and match piping and equipment. B. Water Flow Indicators: Vane - type water -flow detector, rated for 250 - psig (1725 -kPa) working pressure; designed for horizontal or vertical installation; with 2 single -pole, double -throw circuit switches to provide isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125 -V ac and 0.25 A, 24 -V dc; complete with factory-set, field - adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal when cover is removed. C. Supervisory Switches: Single pole, double throw; designed to signal valve in other than fully 1 open position. D. Pressure Switches: Single pole, double throw; designed to signal increase in pressure. 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 1 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following applications. B. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure 1 rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated. C. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping. • FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 34 1 MGA #053570 08/06 D. Flanges, unions , grooved-end-pipe cou lin s, and s P ecial fittings may be used, instead of joints g P g indicated, on aboveground piping and piping in vaults. E. Underground water - service piping NPS 3/4 to NPS 3 (DN 20 to DN 80) shall be any of the following: 1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A), ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); wrought- copper, solder joint fittings; and brazed, copper, pressure -seal fittings; and pressure- sealed joints. 2. PE, ASTM pipe; insert fittings for PE pipe; and clamped, molded PE fittings; and heat - fusion joints. 3. PVC, Schedule 40 pipe; PVC, Schedule 40, socket fittings; and solvent- cemented joints. ' 4. NPS 1 to NPS 3 (DN 25 to DN 80) fiberglass, AWWA RTRP, Class 150, 200, 250; RTRF; and bonded joints. 5. Fiberglass, AWWA RTRP, Class 150, 200, 250]; RTRF; and bonded joints. ' F. Underground water - service piping NPS 4 to NPS 8 (DN 100 to DN 200) shall be the following: 1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M,Type A), ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); wrought- copper, solder joint fittings; and brazed joints. 2. Ductile -iron, • push-on-joint pipe; ductile -iron, push-on-joint fittings; and gasketed, mechanical joint pipe; ductile -iron, mechanical joint fittings; and mechanical, grooved- end pipe; ductile -iron -pipe appurtenances; and grooved joints. 3. PE, AWWA pipe; PE, AWWA fittings; and heat - fusion joints. 4. PVC, Schedule 40 pipe; PVC, Schedule 40 socket fittings; and solvent- cemented joints. 5. NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150): NPS 6 (DN 150) PVC, AWWA Class 150 pipe; PVC, AWWA Class 150 fabricated or molded fittings; and gasketed joints. 6. NPS 8 (DN 200): PVC, AWWA Class 200 pipe; PVC, AWWA Class 200 fabricated] ' [push-on-joint, ductile -iron, mechanical joint, ductile -iron fittings; and gasketed joints. 7. Fiberglass, AWWA RTRP, Class 150, 200, 250; RTRF; and bonded joints. ' G. Water Meter Box Water- Service Piping NPS 3/4 to NPS 2 (DN 20 to DN 50) shall be same as underground water - service piping. H. Aboveground and Vault Water- Service Piping NPS 3/4 to NPS 3 (DN 20 to DN 80) shall be the 1 following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A), ASTM B 88, Type L ' (ASTM B 88M, Type B); wrought- copper, solder joint fittings; and brazed, copper, pressure -seal fittings; and pressure- sealed joints. 2. PVC, Schedule 80 pipe; PVC, Schedule 80 socket fittings; and solvent- cemented ' threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 3. NPS 1 to NPS 2 (DN 25 to DN 50) fiberglass, AWWA RTRP, Class 150, 200, [250]; RTRF; and bonded joints. 1 I. Aboveground and vault water- service piping [PS 4 to NPS 8 (DN 100 to DN 200) shall be the following: ' 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A), ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); wrought- copper, solder joint fittings; and brazed joints. 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 35 1 1 MGA #053570 ' 08/06 grooved-end pipe; ductile-iron, grooved-end appurtenances; and 2. Ductile-iron, groo p p , , gr pp gr ooved joints. 3. PVC, Schedule 80 pipe; PVC, Schedule 80 socket fittings; and solvent- cemented [threaded fittings; and threaded] joints. 4. Fiberglass, AWWA RTRP, Class 150, 200, 250; RTRF; and bonded joints. J. Underground Fire- Service -Main Piping NPS 4 to NPS 12 (DN 100 to DN 300) shall be the 1 following: 1. Ductile -iron, push-on-joint pipe; ductile -iron, push-on-joint fittings; and gasketed, 1 mechanical joint pipe; ductile -iron, mechanical joint fittings; and mechanical, grooved - end pipe; ductile -iron -pipe appurtenances; and grooved joints. 2. PE, Class 150, 200, fire- service pipe; molded PE fittings; and heat - fusion joints. 1 3. PVC, AWWA Class 150 pipe listed for fire - protection service; PVC Class 150 fabricated or molded fittings; and gasketed joints. 4. PVC, AWWA Class 200 pipe listed for fire- protection service; PVC Class 200 fabricated fittings; and gasketed joints. 5. Fiberglass, AWWA, FMG- approved RTRP, Class 150, 200; RTRF; and gasketed joints. 6. Fiberglass, UL RTRP, Class [150] [200] [250]; RTRF; and gasketed joints. K. Aboveground and Vault Fire- Service -Main Piping NPS 4 to NPS 12 (DN 100 to DN 300) shall be ductile -iron, grooved -end pipe; ductile -iron -pipe appurtenances; and grooved joints. L. Underground Combined Water- Service and Fire-Service-Main Piping NPS 6 to NPS 12 (DN 150 to DN 300) shall be the following: 1. Ductile -iron, push-on-joint pipe; ductile -iron, push-on-joint fittings; and gasketed, mechanical joint pipe; ductile -iron, mechanical joint fittings; and mechanical, grooved - end pipe; ductile -iron -pipe appurtenances; and grooved] joints. 2. PVC, AWWA Class 150, 200 pipe listed for fire- protection service; PVC fabricated or molded fittings of same class as pipe; and gasketed joints. 3. Fiberglass, AWWA, FMG- approved RTRP, Class [150] [200]; RTRF; and gasketed joints. 1 M. Aboveground[ and Vault] Combined Water Service and Fire- Service -Main Piping [NPS 6 to NPS 12 (DN 150 to DN 300)] <Insert pipe size range> shall be ductile -iron, grooved -end pipe; ductile -iron -pipe appurtenances; and grooved joints. 3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS 1 A. General Application: Use mechanical-joint-end valves for NPS 3 (DN 80) and larger underground installation. Use threaded- or flanged -end valves for installation in vaults. Use . UL/FMG, nonrising -stem gate valves for installation with indicator posts. Use corporation valves and curb valves with ends compatible with piping, for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller installation. 1 B. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 36 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1. Underground Valves NPS 3 (DN 80) and Larger: AWWA, cast -iron, nonrising-stem, � ( ) -stem, g g metal, resilient, high - pressure, resilient- seated gate valves with valve box. 2. Underground Valves, NPS 4 (DN 100) and Larger, for Indicator Posts: UL/FMG, cast - iron, nonrising -stem gate valves with indicator post. 3. Use the following for valves in vaults and aboveground: a. Gate Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze, nonrising, rising stem. b. Gate Valves, NPS 3 (DN 80) and Larger: AWWA, cast iron, OS &Y rising stem, ' metal seated AWWA, cast iron, OS &Y rising stem, resilient seated UL/FMG, cast iron, OS &Y rising stem. c. Check Valves: AWWA C508, UL/FMG, swing type. 1 4. Pressure - Reducing Valves: Use for water - service piping in vaults and aboveground to control water pressure. 5. Relief Valves: Use for water- service piping in vaults and aboveground. 1 a. Air- Release Valves: To release accumulated air. b. AirNacuum Valves: To release or admit large volume of air during filling of ' piping. c. Combination Air Valves: To release or admit air. ' 6. Detector Check Valves: Use for water - service piping in vaults and aboveground to detect unauthorized use of water. 1 3.4 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping- system common 1 requirements. ' 3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Water -Main Connection: Arrange with utility company for tap of size and in location indicated in water main. B. Water -Main Connection: Tap water main according to requirements of water utility company and of size and in location indicated. 1 C. Make connections larger than NPS 2 (DN 50) with tapping machine according to the following: 1. Install tapping sleeve and tapping valve according to MSS SP -60. 2. Install tapping sleeve on pipe to be tapped. Position flanged outlet for gate valve. 3. Use tapping machine compatible with valve and tapping sleeve; cut hole in main. Remove tapping machine and connect water- service piping. ' 4. Install gate valve onto tapping sleeve. Comply with MSS SP -60. Install valve with stem pointing up and with valve box. D. Make connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller with drilling machine according to the following: FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 37 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1. Install service - saddle assemblies and corporation valves m size, quantity, and arrangement required by utility company standards. 2. Install service - saddle assemblies on water - service pipe to be tapped. Position outlets for corporation valves. 3. Use drilling machine compatible with service - saddle assemblies and corporation valves. Drill hole in main. Remove drilling machine and connect water - service piping. 4. Install corporation valves into service - saddle assemblies. 5. Install manifold for multiple taps m water main. 6. Install curb valve in water- service piping with head pointing up and with service box. E. Comply with NFPA 24 for fire- service -main piping materials and installation. 1. Install PE corrosion- protection encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. 1 2. Install copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." F. Install ductile -iron, water - service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41. 1 1. Install PE corrosion- protection encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C 105. G. Install PE pipe according to ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 645. 1 H. Install PVC, AWWA pipe according to ASTM F 645 and AWWA M23. I. Install fiberglass AWWA pipe according to AWWA M45. J. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 30 inches (750 mm), with top at least 12 inches (300 mm) below level of maximum frost penetration, and according to the following: 1. Under Driveways: With at least 36 inches (910 mm) cover over top. 2. Under Railroad Tracks: With at least 48 inches (1220 mm) cover over top. 3. In Loose Gravelly Soil and Rock: With at least 12 inches (300 mm) additional cover. K. Install piping by tunneling or jacking, or combination of both, under streets and other obstructions that cannot be disturbed. L. Extend water - service piping and connect to water - supply source and building- water - piping systems at outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated. 1. Terminate water - service piping at building wall until building- water - piping systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to building- water - piping systems when those systems are installed. M. Sleeves are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." N. Mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." 1 O. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use restrained joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie -rods and clamps, and other supports. P. See Division 21 Section "Water -Based Fire- Suppression Systems" for fire- suppression -water piping inside the building. FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 38 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 Q. See Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for potable -water piping inside the building. ' 3.6 JOINT CONSTRUCTION 1 A. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic piping joint construction. ' B. Make pipe joints according to the following: 1. Copper - Tubing, Pressure- Sealed Joints: Use proprietary crimping tool and procedure recommended by copper, pressure- seal - fitting manufacturer. ' 2. Ductile -Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Water- Service Piping: AWWA C600 and AWWA M41. 3. Ductile -Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire- Service -Main Piping: UL 194. 1 4. Ductile -Iron Piping, Grooved Joints: Cut - groove pipe. Assemble joints with grooved - end, ductile - iron - piping couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling manufacturer's written instructions. ' 5. PE Piping Insert- Fitting Joints: Use plastic insert fittings and fasteners according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions. 6. PVC Piping Gasketed Joints: Use joining materials according to AWWA C900. Construct joints with elastomeric seals and lubricant according to ASTM D 2774 or ASTM D 3139 and pipe manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Fiberglass Piping Bonded Joints: Use adhesive and procedure recommended by piping ' manufacturer. 8. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials, with OD, and with system working pressure. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for joining piping of dissimilar metals. 3.7 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION 1 A. Anchorage, General: Install water - distribution piping with restrained joints. Anchorages and restrained joint types that may be used include the following: ' 1. Concrete thrust blocks. 2. Locking mechanical joints. 3. Set -screw mechanical retainer glands. 4. Bolted flanged joints. 5. Heat -fused joints. 6. Pipe clamps and tie rods. 1 B. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. Include anchorages for the following piping systems: 1. Gasketed - Joint, Ductile -Iron, Water - Service Piping: According to AWWA C600. 2. Gasketed - Joint, PVC Water- Service Piping: According to AWWA M23. 3. Bonded -Joint Fiberglass, Water- Service Piping: According to AWWA M45. 1 4. Fire- Service -Main Piping: According to NFPA 24. 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 39 1 MGA #053570 08/06 C. Apply 1 full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion- resistant material to surfaces of installed P P ferrous anchorage devices. 1 3.8 VALVE INSTALLATION A. AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each 1 underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box. B. AWWA Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. 1 C. UL/FMG, Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. Install each underground valve and valves in vaults with stem pointing up and with vertical cast -iron indicator post. 1 D. UL/FMG, Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. E. MSS Valves: Install as component of connected piping system. 1 F. Corporation Valves and Curb Valves: Install each underground curb valve with head pointed 1 up and with service box. G. Pressure - Reducing Valves: Install in vault or aboveground between shutoff valves. Install full - size valved bypass. 1 H. Relief Valves: Comply with AWWA C512. Install aboveground with shutoff valve on inlet. 3.9 DETECTOR -CHECK VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install in vault or aboveground. B. Install for proper direction of flow. Install bypass with water meter, gate valves on each side of meter, and check valve downstream from meter. 1 C. Support detector check valves, meters, shutoff valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers. 3.10 WATER METER INSTALLATION A. Install water meters, piping, and specialties according to utility company's written instructions. 1 B. Water Meters: Install displacement, turbine -type water meters, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, in meter boxes with shutoff valves on water meter inlets. Include valves on water meter outlets and valved bypass around meters unless prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Meters: Install compound, turbine -type water meters, NPS 3 (DN 80) and larger, in meter vaults. Include shutoff valves on water meter inlets and outlets and valved bypass around meters. Support meters, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers. D. Water Meters: Install detector -type water meters in meter vault according to AWWA M6. Include shutoff valves on water meter inlets and outlets and full -size valved bypass around meters. Support meters, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers. 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 40 1 MGA #053570 08/06 3.11 ROUGHING -IN FOR WATER METERS A. Rough -in piping and specialties for water meter installation according to utility company's written instructions. 3.12 VACUUM BREAKER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION ' A. Install pressure vacuum breaker assemblies of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks. Install according to requirements of plumbing and health department and authorities having jurisdiction. 1 B. Do not install pressure vacuum breaker assemblies in vault or other space subject to flooding. 3.13 BACKFLOW PREVENTER INSTALLATION A. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks. Install according to requirements of plumbing and health department and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Do not install backflow preventers that have relief drain in vault or in other spaces subject to 1 flooding. C. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers. 1 D. Support NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and larger backflow preventers, valves, and piping near floor and on brick or concrete piers. 3.14 WATER METER BOX INSTALLATION ' A. Install water meter boxes in paved areas flush with surface. B. Install water meter boxes in grass or earth areas with top 2 inches (50 mm) above surface. ' 3.15 CONCRETE VAULT INSTALLATION ' A. Install precast concrete vaults according to ASTM C 891. 3.16 PROTECTIVE ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION A. Install concrete base level and with top approximately 2 inches (50 min) above grade. ' B. Install protective enclosure over valves and equipment. C. Anchor protective enclosure to concrete base. 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 41 1 MGA #053570 08/06 3.17 FIRE HYDRANT INSTALLATION A. General: Install each fire hydrant with separate gate valve in supply pipe, anchor with restrained joints or thrust blocks, and support in upright position. B. Wet - Barrel Fire Hydrants: Install with valve below frost line. Provide for drainage. C. AWWA Fire Hydrants: Comply with AWWA M17. D. UL/FMG Fire Hydrants: Comply with NFPA 24. 1 3.18 FLUSHING HYDRANT INSTALLATION 1 A. Install post -type flushing hydrants with valve below frost line and provide for drainage. Support in upright position. Include separate gate valve or curb valve and restrained joints in supply piping. B. Install ground -type flushing hydrants with valve below frost line and provide for drainage. Install hydrant box flush with grade. Include separate gate valve or curb valve and restrained joints in supply piping. C. Install sampling stations with valve below frost line and provide for drainage. Attach weather- resistant housing and support in upright position. Include separate curb valve in supply piping. 3.19 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION 1 A. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection to mains. , B. Install protective pipe bollards on two sides of on three sides of each fire department connection. Pipe bollards are specified in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications." 1 3.20 ALARM DEVICE INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with NFPA 24 for devices and methods of valve supervision. Underground 1 valves with valve box do not require supervision. B. Supervisory Switches: Supervise valves in open position. 1 1. Valves: Grind away portion of exposed valve stem. Bolt switch, with plunger in stem depression, to OS &Y gate -valve yoke. 2. Indicator Posts: Drill and thread hole in upper - barrel section at target plate. Install switch, with toggle against target plate, on barrel of indicator post. C. Locking and Sealing: Secure unsupervised valves as follows: 1 1. Valves: Install chain and padlock on open OS &Y gate valve. 2. Post Indicators: Install padlock on wrench on indicator post: , D. Pressure Switches: Drill and thread hole in exposed barrel of fire hydrant. Install switch. 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 42 1 MGA #053570 08/06 E. Water -Flow Indicators: Install in water-service P i P g in m vault. Select indicator with saddle and vane matching pipe size. Drill hole m pipe, insert vane, and bolt saddle to pipe. F. Connect alarm devices to building fire alarm system. Wiring and fire -alarm devices are specified in Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm." 1 3.21 CONNECTIONS 1 A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 1 B. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping connections to valves and equipment. C. Connect water - distribution piping to utility water main and existing water main. Use tapping sleeve and tapping valve, service clamp and corporation valve. D. Connect water - distribution piping to interior domestic water and fire- suppression piping. E. Connect waste piping from concrete vault drains to sanitary sewerage system. See Division 22 Section "Facility Sanitary Sewers" for connection to sanitary- sewer, storm - drainage system. 1 See Division 33 Section "Storm Utility Drainage Piping" for connection to storm -sewer piping. F. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical 1 Systems." G. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low - Voltage Electrical Power Conductors 1 and Cables." 3.22 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ' A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to 1 stabilize system. Use only potable water. B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one- and - one -half times working pressure for two hours. ' 1. Increase pressure in 50 -psig (350 -kPa) increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig (0 kPa). Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts (1.89 L) per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed limits. 1 C. Prepare reports of testing activities. 1 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 43 1 MGA #053570 08/06 3.23 IDENTIFICATION A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground water - distribution piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. Underground warning tapes are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." B. Permanently attach equipment nameplate or marker indicating plastic water - service piping, on main electrical meter panel. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for identifying devices. 3.24 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect water - distribution piping as follows: 1. Purge new water - distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet. 3. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or do as follows: a. Fill system or part of system with water /chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours. b. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water /chlorine solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours. c. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine remains in water coming from system. 1 d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination. B. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities. 1 END OF SECTION 221113 1 1 1 1 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 44 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 SECTION 221313 - FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes gravity-flow, non - pressure sanitary sewerage outside the building, with the following components: ' 1. Special fittings for expansion and deflection. 2. Backwater valves. 3. Cleanouts. 4. Corrosion- protection piping encasement. 1 5. Precast concrete manholes. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ABS: Acrylonitrile- butadiene - styrene plastic. 1 B. EPDM: Ethylene- propylene - diene- monomer rubber. C. FRP: Fiberglass - reinforced plastic. D. LLDPE: Linear low- density, polyethylene plastic. ' E. PE: Polyethylene plastic. F. PP: Polypropylene plastic. 1 G. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. H. RTRF: Glass- fiber- reinforced, thermosetting -resin fitting. I. RTRP: Glass- fiber - reinforced, thermosetting -resin pipe. J. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Gravity-Flow, Non - pressure, Drainage- Piping Pressure Rating: 10 -foot head of water (30 kPa). 1 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 B. Force -Main, Pressure-Piping Pressure Rating: At least equal to system operating pressure but P g g q P not less than 50 psig (345 kPa). 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1 1. Special pipe fittings. 2. Backwater valves. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames and covers. Include design calculations, and concrete design -mix report for cast -in -place manholes. C. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in same 1 trench and clearances from sewerage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate structures. D. Profile Drawings: Show system piping in elevation. Draw profiles at horizontal scale of not less than 1 inch equals 50 feet (1:500) and vertical scale of not less than 1 inch equals 5 feet (1:50). Indicate manholes and piping. Show types, sizes, materials, and elevations of other utilities crossing system piping. E. Field quality- control test reports. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight. B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage. C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Sewerage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Architect's and Owner's written permission. 1 1 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 2 1 MGA #053570 08/06 ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers ' offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 1 manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials. 1 2.3 HUB- AND - SPIGOT, CAST -IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS ' A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service and Extra -Heavy classes. ' B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber. 2.4 HUBLESS CAST -IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS 1 A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. B. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion- resistant ' fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. C. Shielded, Stainless -Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with ASTM A 666, Type 301, stainless -steel corrugated shield; stainless -steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. ' 1. Manufacturers: ' a. ANACO. b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. c. Femco Inc. ' d. Ideal Div.; Stant Corp. e. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. f. Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div. 1 2. Couplings for NPS 1 -1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): 2 -1/8 -inch- (54 -mm -) wide shield with 2 bands. 1 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 3 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 3. Couplings for NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 3 -inch- (76 -mm -) wide shield with 4 bands. 4. Couplings for NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250): 4 -inch- (100 -mm -) wide shield I with 4 bands. D. Heavy -Duty, Shielded, Stainless -Steel Couplings, NPS 10 (DN 250) and Smaller: With ASTM A 666, Type 301 or Type 304, stainless -steel shield; 2 or more stainless -steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. 1. Manufacturers: 1 a. ANACO. b. Clamp -All Corp. c. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. d. Ideal Div.; Stant Corp. e. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. f. Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div. 2. Couplings for NPS 1 -1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): 3 inches (76 mm). 3. Couplings for NPS 5 to NPS 10 (DN 125 to DN 250): 4 inches (100 mm). E. Heavy -Duty, Shielded, Stainless -Steel Couplings, NPS 12 and NPS 15 (DN 300 and DN 375): With ASTM A 666, Type 301 or Type 304, stainless -steel shield; stainless -steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. 1. Manufacturers: a. ANACO. b. Ideal Div.; Stant Corp. c. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div. 2. Couplings: 5 -1/2 -inch- (140 -mm -) wide shield with 6 bands. 1 F. Heavy -Duty, Cast -Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48/A 48M, two- piece, cast -iron housing; stainless - steel bolts and nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. 1. Manufacturers: a. MG Piping Products Co. 2. Couplings for NPS 1 -1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): 2 -1/8 -inch- (54 -mm -) wide housing with 2 bolts. 3. Couplings for NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 3 -118 -inch- (80 -mm -) wide housing with 4 bolts. 4. Couplings for NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250): 4 -inch- (100 -mm -) wide housing with 4 bolts. G. Unshielded Couplings: ASTM C 1461, rigid, sleeve -type, _reducing- or transition -type mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion- resistant -metal tension band and tightening :mechanism on each end. 1 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 4 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 1. Manufacturers: 1 a. ANACO. 2. Couplings for NPS 1 -1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): Sleeve with two bands. 2.5 DUCTILE -IRON, GRAVITY SEWER PIPE AND FITTINGS 1 A. Pipe: ASTM A 746, for push -on joints. B. Standard Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron, for push -on joints. C. Compact Fittings: AWWA C153, for push -on joints. D. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. 2.6 DUCTILE -IRON PRESSURE PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: AWWA C151, for push -on joints. B. Standard Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron, for push -on joints. C. Compact Fittings: AWWA C153, for push -on joints. D. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. 1 2.7 STAINLESS -STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: 1. Blucher -Josam Div.; Josam Company. ' B. Pipe and Fittings: ASME A112.3.1, stainless- steel, pipe and fittings with socket and spigot ends fabricated with ASTM A 666, Type 304L, stainless steel for gasketed joints. C. Gaskets: Lip seals shaped to fit socket groove, with plastic backup ring. 1. General Applications: EPDM, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Applications for Fluids Containing Gasoline or Oil: NBR, unless otherwise indicated. 2.8 ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS 1 A. ABS Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2751, with bell- and - spigot ends for gasketed joints. 1. NPS 3 to NPS 6 (DN 80 to DN 150): SDR 35. ' 2. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): SDR 42. 3. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 1 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 5 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2.9 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PVC Pressure Pipe: AWWA C900, Class 100, for gasketed joints and using ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 1. Fittings NPS 4 to NPS 8 (DN 100 to DN 200): PVC pressure fittings complying with AWWA C907, for gasketed joints and using ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 2. Fittings NPS 10 (DN 250) and Larger: Ductile -iron, compact fittings complying with AWWA C153, for push -on joints and using AWWA C111, rubber gaskets. B. PVC Water- Service Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40 pipe, with plain ends for solvent- cemented joints with ASTM D 2466, Schedule 40, socket -type fittings. C. PVC Cellular -Core Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 891, Sewer and Drain Series, PS 50 minimum stiffness pipe with ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, socket -type fittings for solvent- cemented joints. D. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 (DN 375) and Smaller: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, with 1 bell- and - spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. E. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 18 (DN 450) and Larger: ASTM F 679, T -[1] [2] wall 1 thickness, with bell - and - spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. F. PVC Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 794 pipe, with bell -and- spigot ends; ASTM D 3034 fittings, with bell ends; and ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 2.10 FIBERGLASS PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Fiberglass Sewer Pipe: ASTM D 3262, RTRP for gasketed joints fabricated with Type 2, polyester or Type 4, epoxy resin. 1 1. Liner: 1, reinforced thermoset 2. Grade: Reinforced, surface layer matching pipe resin. 3. Stiffness: A, 9 psig (62 kPa). B. Fiberglass Nonpressure Fittings: ASTM D 3840, RTRF for gasketed joints. 1. Laminating Resin: Type 1, polyester or Type 2, epoxy resin. 2. Reinforcement: Grade with fmish compatible with resin. C. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 2.11 CONCRETE PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Nonreinforced- Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 14 (ASTM C 14M), Class 1, with bell- and - spigot or groove and tongue ends for gasketed joints with ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber gaskets. B. Reinforced- Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76 (ASTM C 76M), with bell-and- 1 spigot or groove and tongue ends for gasketed joints with ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber gaskets. 1 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 6 1 i MGA #053570 08/06 1 1. Class II, Wall C. 2. Class III, Wall C. 3. Class IV, Wall C. 4. Class V, Wall C 2.12 NONPRESSURE -TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve -type, reducing or transition coupling, for ' joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion - resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1 B. Sleeve Materials: 1. For Concrete Pipes: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. 2. For Cast -Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 3. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 4. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined. C. Unshielded, Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric sleeve with stainless -steel shear ring and corrosion- resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Manufacturers: a. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. b. Femco Inc. c. Logan Clay Products Company (The). d. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. e. NDS Inc. f. Plastic Oddities, Inc. 1 D. Shielded, Flexible Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full - length, corrosion- resistant outer shield and corrosion- resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. c. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. 1 E. Ring -Type, Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring. 1 1. Manufacturers: a. Femco Inc. b. Logan Clay Products Company (The). c. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. 1 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 7 1 MGA #053570 08/06 F. Non ressure -T a Rigid Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve-type reducing- or transition-type YP , g tYP g h'e P mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion - resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1 1. Manufacturers: a. ANACO. 1 2.13 PRESSURE -TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS 1 A. Reducing or transition, metal, bolted, sleeve -type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground pressure piping. Include 150 -psig (1035 -kPa) minimum pressure rating and ends ,11 of same sizes as piping to be joined. B. Tubular- Sleeve Couplings: AWWA C219, with center sleeve, gaskets, end rings, and bolt fasteners. 1. Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. b. Dresser, Inc.; DMD Div. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Div. d. JCM Industries. e. Romac Industries, Inc. f. Smith - Blair, Inc. g. Viking Johnson. 2. Center - Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard Ductile iron. 3. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber. 4. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion - resistant coating or material. C. Split- Sleeve Couplings: With split sleeve with sealing pad and closure plates, 0-ring gaskets, and bolt fasteners. 1. Manufacturers: a. Brico Industries. 2. Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Sleeve Dimensions: Of thickness and width required to provide pressure rating. 4. Gasket Material: O -ri :ngs made of EPDM rubber, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion - resistant coating or material. 2.14 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS 1 A. Ductile -Iron, Flexible Expansion Joints: Compound fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical -joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include 2 gasketed ball joint sections and 1 or more gasketed sleeve sections, rated for 250 -psig (1725 -kPa) minimum working pressure and for offset and expansion indicated. 1 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 8 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1. Manufacturers: a. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc. b. Romac Industries, Inc. c. Star Pipe Products. 111 B. Ductile -Iron Deflection Fittings: Compound coupling fitting with ball joint, flexing section, gaskets, and restrained joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include rating for 250 -psig (1725 -kPa) minimum working pressure and for up to 15 degrees of deflection. 1. Manufacturers: a. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc. C. Ductile -Iron Expansion Joints: Three -piece assembly of telescoping sleeve with gaskets and restrained -type, ductile -iron or steel with protective coating, bell -and- spigot end sections complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include rating for 250 -psig (1725 -kPa) minimum working pressure and for expansion indicated. 1. Manufacturers: a. Dresser, Inc.; DMD Div. b. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc. c. JCM Industries. d. Smith- Blair, Inc. 2.15 BACKWATER VALVES A. Gray -Iron Backwater Valves: ASME A112.14.1, gray -iron body and bolted cover, with bronze seat. 1. Manufacturers: a. Josam Company. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. c. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. d. Watts Industries, Inc. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Enpoco, Inc. Div. f. Zurn Specification Drainage Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group. 2. Horizontal Type: With swing check valve and hub -and- spigot ends. 3. Combination Horizontal and Manual Gate -Valve Type: With swing check valve, integral gate valve, and hub -and- spigot ends. 4. Terminal Type: With bronze seat, swing check valve, and hub inlet. B. PVC Backwater Valves: Horizontal type; with PVC body, PVC removable cover, and PVC ' swing check valve. 1. Manufacturers: 1 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 9 1 . MGA #053570 08/06 a. Canplas Inc. b. IPS Corporation. c. NDS Inc. d. Plastic Oddities, Inc. e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. f. Zum Light Commercial Specialty Plumbing Products; Zum Plumbing Products Group. 2.16 CLEANOUTS A. Gray -Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray -iron housing with clamping device and round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray -iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot 1 connection and countersunk, tapered- thread, brass closure plug. 1. Manufacturers: a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB Manufacturing Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. d. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. e. Watts Industries, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Enpoco, Inc. Div. g. Zurn Specification Drainage Operation; Zum Plumbing Products Group. 2. Top - Loading Classification: Extra -heavy duty. 3. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings. B. PVC Cleanouts: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and riser to cleanout of same material as sewer piping. 1. Manufacturers: ; 1 a. Canplas Inc. b. IPS Corporation. c. NDS Inc. d. Plastic Oddities, Inc. e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. f. Zum Light Commercial Specialty Plumbing Products; Zurn Plumbing Products Group. 2.17 CORROSION - PROTECTION PIPING ENCASEMENT A. Encasement for Underground Metal Piping: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. 1. Form: Sheet or tube. 2. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008 -inch (0.20 -mm) minimum thickness. 3. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008 -inch (0.20 -mm) minimum thickness or high- density, crosslaminated PE film of 0.004 -inch (0.10 -mm) minimum thickness. r FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 10 1 1, MGA #053570 08/06 Material: High-density, crosslaminated PE film of 0.004 -inch 0.10 -mm 4. a ( ) minimum thickness. 5. Color: Black. 1 2.18 MANHOLES A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints. 1. Diameter: 48 inches ( 1200 mm) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, 1 as required to prevent flotation. 3. Base Section: 6 -inch (150 -mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 4 -inch (100 -mm) minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor. 4. Riser Sections: 4 -inch (100 -mm) minimum thickness, and of length to provide depth indicated. 5. Top Section: Eccentric -cone type, unless concentric -cone or flat - slab -top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. 6. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber. 7. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe connection. 8. Steps: Individual FRP steps, FRP ladder, or ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16 -inch (300- to 400 -mm) intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60 inches (1500 mm). 9. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer. 10. Grade Rings: Reinforced - concrete rings, 6- to 9 -inch (150- to 225 -mm) total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover. 11. Protective Coating: Plant- applied, SSPC -Paint 16; 10 -mil (0.26 -mm) minimum thickness applied to exterior and interior surfaces. 12. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24 -inch (610 -mm) ID by 7- to 9 -inch (175- to 225 -mm) riser with 4 -inch- (100 -mm -) minimum width flange and 26 -inch- (660-nun-) diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording 1 equivalent to "SANITARY SEWER." a. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60 -40 -18 ductile or ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 35 t gray iron, unless otherwise indicated. b. Protective Coating: Foundry- applied, SSPC -Paint 16, coal -tar, epoxy - polyamide paint; 10 -mil (0.26 -mm) minimum thickness applied to all surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. B. Designed Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 913; designed according to ASTM C 890 for A -16 (ASSHTO HS20 -44), heavy - traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, and dimensions 1 indicated, with provision for sealant joints. 1 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 11 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1. Ballast: Increase thickness of one or more P recast concrete sections or add concrete to manhole as required to prevent flotation. 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990 (ASTM 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber. 3. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe connection. 4. Steps: Individual FRP steps, FRP ladder, or ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16 -inch (300- to 400 -mm) intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60 inches (1500 mm). 5. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer. 6. Grade Rings: Reinforced- concrete rings, 6- to 9 -inch (150- to 225 -mm) total thickness, to match diameter of rnanhole frame and cover. 7. Protective Coating: Plant- applied, SSPC -Paint 16 10 -mil (0.26 -mm) minimum thickness applied to exterior and interior surfaces. 8. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24 -inch (610 -mm) ID by 7- to 9 -inch (175- to 225 -mm) riser with 4 -inch- (100 -mm -) minimum width flange and 26 -inch- (660 -mm -) diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "SANITARY SEWER." a. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60 -40 -18 ductile or ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 35 1 gray iron, unless otherwise indicated. b. Protective Coating: Foundry- applied,. SSPC -Paint 16, coal -tar, epoxy - polyamide paint; 10 -mil (0.26 -mm) minimum thickness applied to all surfaces, unless 1 otherwise indicated. C. Cast -in- Place- Concrete Manholes: Construct of reinforced- concrete bottom, walls, and top; designed according to ASTM C 890 for A -16 (ASSHTO HS20 -44), heavy - traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, dimensions, and appurtenances indicated. 1. Ballast: Increase thickness of concrete as required to prevent flotation. 1 2. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe connection. 3. Steps: Individual FRP steps, FRP ladder, or ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16 -inch (300- to 400 -mm) intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60 inches (1500 mm). 4. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer. 5. Grade Rings: Reinforced - concrete rings, 6- to 9 -inch (150- to 225 -mm) total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover. 6. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24 -inch (610 -mm) ID by 7- to 9 -inch (175- to 225 -mm) riser with 4-inch- (100 -mm -) minimum width flange and 26 -inch- (660 -mm -) diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "SANITARY SEWER." 1. 1 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 12 1 ,1. MGA #053570 08/06 : ASTM A 536, Grade 60 -40 -18 ductile or ASTM A 48/A 48M a. Material: al. TM 48M, Class 35 gray iron, unless otherwise indicated. b. Protective Coating: Foundry- applied, SSPC -Paint 16, coal -tar, epoxy - polyamide paint; [10 -mil (0.26 -mm)] [15 -mil (0.38 -mm)] minimum thickness applied to all surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. D. Fiberglass Manholes: ASTM D 3753, fabricated, FRP. 1. Manufacturers: a. Associated Fiberglass Enterprises. g rP b. Containment Solutions, Inc. c. L.F. Manufacturing, Inc. 2. Diameter: 48 inches (1200 mm) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Ballast: Increase thickness of concrete base as required to prevent flotation. 4. Base Section: Concrete, 6 -inch (150 -mm) minimum thickness. 5. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe connection. 6. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on one step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16 -inch (300- to 400 -mm) intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60 inches (1500 mm). 7. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer. 8. Grade Rings: Reinforced - concrete rings, 6- to 9 -inch (150- to 225 -mm) total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover. 9. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24 -inch (610 -mm) ID by 7- to 9 -inch (175- to 225 -mm) riser with 4 -inch- (100 -mm -) minimum width flange and 26 -inch- (660 -mm -) diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "SANITARY SEWER." 1 a. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60 -40 -18 ductile or ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 35 gray iron, unless otherwise indicated. b. Protective Coating: Foundry- applied, SSPC -Paint 16, coal -tar, epoxy - polyamide paint; 10 -mil (0.26 -mm) minimum thickness applied to all surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. E. Manhole Cover Inserts: Manufactured, plastic form, of size to fit between manhole frame and cover and designed to prevent stormwater inflow. Include handle for removal and gasket for gastight sealing. 1. Manufacturers: a. FRW Industries; a Syneco Systems, Inc. company. 1 b. Knutson Enterprises. c. L.F. Manufacturing, Inc. d. Parson Environmental Products, Inc. 1 e. 2. Type: With drainage and vent holes. 1 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 13 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2.19 CONCRETE A. General: Cast -in -place concrete according to ACI 318/318R, ACI 350R, and the following: 1 1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: A STM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable. B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum 1 water /cementitious materials ratio. 1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa), deformed steel. C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design mix, 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum water /cementitious materials ratio. Include channels and benches in manholes. 1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of vertical sides to three- fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope. a. Invert Slope: 1 percent through manhole. 2. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel. a. Slope: 4 percent. D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) minimum, with 0.58 maximum water / cementitious materials ratio. 1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa), deformed steel. 2.20 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Paint: SSPC -Paint 16. B. PE Sheeting: ASTM D 4397, with at least 8 -mil (0.2 -mm) thickness or other equivalent, impervious material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 1 1 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 14 MGA #053570 08/06 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Pipe couplings and special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use nonpressure -type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure sewer piping, unless otherwise indicated. a. Shielded flexible or rigid couplings for same or minor difference OD pipes. b. Unshielded, increaser /reducer - pattem, flexible or rigid couplings for pipes with different OD. c. Ring -type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation. 2. Use pressure -type pipe couplings for force -main joints. B. Special Pipe Fittings: Use for pipe expansion and deflection. Pipe couplings and special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, 1 unless otherwise indicated. C. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure Sewer Piping: Use the following pipe materials for each size range: 1. NPS 3 (DN 80): Hub -and- spigot, Extra -Heavy class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. NPS 3 (DN 80): Hubless cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy -duty, shielded, stainless - steel couplings; and coupled joints. 3. NPS 3 (DN 80): NPS 6 (DN 150) ductile -iron, gravity sewer pipe or NPS 3 or NPS 4 (DN 80 or DN 100) ductile -iron pressure pipe; ductile -iron standard or compact fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 4. NPS 3 (DN 80): Stainless -steel drainage pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. Use EPDM - compound gaskets, unless otherwise indicated. Use nitrile- rubber - compound 1 gaskets for wastes containing gasoline or oil. 5. NPS 3 (DN 80): ABS, SDR 35, sewer pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 6. NPS 3 (DN 80): PVC water- service pipe; PVC Schedule 40, water-service-pipe fittings; and solvent- cemented joints. 7. NPS 3 (DN 80): NPS 4 (DN 100) PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 8. NPS 3 (DN 80): NPS 4 (DN 100) Class 2, nonreinforced- concrete sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 9. NPS 4 (DN 100): Hub - and - spigot, Extra -Heavy class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 10. NPS 4 (DN 100): Hubless cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy -duty, shielded, stainless - steel couplings; and coupled joints. • 11. NPS 4 (DN 100): NPS 6 (DN 150) ductile -iron, gravity sewer pipe or NPS 4 (DN 100) ductile -iron pressure pipe; ductile -iron standard or compact fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 12. NPS 4 (DN 100): Stainless -steel drainage pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. Use EPDM - compound gaskets, unless otherwise indicated. Use nitrile- rubber - compound gaskets for wastes containing gasoline or oil. 13. NPS 4 (DN 100): ABS, SDR 35, sewer pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 1 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 15 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 14. NPS 4 (DN 100): PVC water - service pipe; PVC Schedule 40, water- service -pipe fittings; and solvent- cemented. joints. 15. NPS 4 (DN 100): PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 16. NPS 4 (DN 100): Class 2, nonreinforced- concrete sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 17. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): Hub -and- spigot, Extra -Heavy class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 18. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): Hubless cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy - duty, shielded, stainless -steel couplings; and coupled joints. 19. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): NPS 6 (DN 150) ductile -iron, gravity sewer pipe; ductile -iron standard or compact fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 20. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): NPS 6 (DN 150) stainless -steel drainage pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. Use EPDM - compound gaskets, unless otherwise indicated. Use nitrile- rubber - compound gaskets for wastes containing gasoline or oil. 21. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): NPS 6 (DN 150) ABS, SDR 35, sewer pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 22. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): NPS 6 (DN 150) cellular -core PVC pipe, PVC sewer pipe fittings, and solvent- cemented joints. 23. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): NPS 6 (DN 150) PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 24. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (1)N 125 and DN 150): NPS 6 (DN 150) Class 2, nonreinforced- concrete sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 25. NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250): Hub -and- spigot, Extra -Heavy class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 26. NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250): Hubless cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy -duty, shielded, stainless -steel couplings; and coupled joints. 27. NPS 8 and NPS 10 (UN 200 and DN 250): Ductile -iron, gravity sewer pipe; ductile -iron standard or compact fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 28. NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250): ABS, SDR 42, sewer pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 29. NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250): Cellular -core PVC pipe, PVC sewer pipe fittings, and solvent- cemented joints. 30. NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250): PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 31. NPS 8 and NPS 10 (I)N 200 and DN 250): PVC profile gravity sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 32. NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250): Fiberglass Type 2 or 4 Class II; sewer RTRP; Type 1 or 2 RTRF, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 33. NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250): Nonreinforced- concrete sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 34. NPS 12 and NPS 15 (DN 300 and DN 375): Hub -and- spigot, Extra -Heavy class, cast - iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 35. NPS 12 and NPS 15 (DN 300 and DN 375): Hubless cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy -duty, shielded, stainless -steel couplings; and coupled joints. 36. NPS 12 to NPS 16 (UN 300 to DN 400): Ductile -iron, gravity sewer pipe; ductile -iron standard or compact fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 37. NPS 12 (DN 300): ABS, SDR 42, sewer pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 38. NPS 12 and NPS 15 (DN 300 and DN 375): PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 1 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 16 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 39. NPS 12 and NPS 15 DN 300 to DN 375): PVC profile gravity sewer pipe and fittings, ( ) P gT tY P P g gaskets, and gasketed joints. 40. NPS 12 to NPS 16 (DN 300 to DN 400): Fiberglass Type 2 or 4, Class III; NPS 12 and NPS 15 (DN 300 and DN 375): Nonreinforced- concrete sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 41. NPS 12 and NPS 15 (DN 300 and DN 375): Reinforced- concrete sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 42. NPS 18 to NPS 24 (DN 450 to DN 600): Ductile -iron, gravity sewer pipe; ductile -iron standard or compact fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 43. NPS 18 to NPS 24 (DN 450 to DN 600): PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 44. NPS 18 to NPS 24 (DN 450 to DN 600): PVC profile gravity sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 45. NPS 18 to NPS 24 (DN 450 to DN 600): Fiberglass Type 2 or 4, Class III; sewer RTRP; Type 1 or 2 RTRF, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 46. NPS 18 to NPS 24 (DN 450 to DN 600): Nonreinforced- concrete sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 47. NPS 18 to NPS 24 (DN 450 to DN 600): Reinforced- concrete sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. D. Force -Main, Pressure Piping: Use the following pipe materials for each size range: 1 1. NPS 2 (DN 50): PVC Schedule 40, water- service pipe; PVC Schedule 40, water- service- pipe fittings; and solvent- cemented joints. 2. NPS 3 (DN 80): Ductile -iron, gravity sewer pipe or ductile -iron pressure pipe; ductile - iron standard or compact fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 3. NPS 3 (DN 80): PVC Schedule 40, water- service pipe; PVC Schedule 40, water- service- pipe fittings; and solvent- cemented joints. 4. NPS 4 (DN 100): Ductile -iron, gravity sewer pipe or ductile -iron pressure pipe; ductile - iron standard or compact fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 5. NPS 4 (DN 100): PVC pressure pipe, PVC pressure fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 6. NPS 6 to NPS 8 (DN 150 to DN 200): Ductile -iron sewer pipe; standard- or compact - pattern, ductile -iron fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 7. NPS 6 to NPS 8 (DN 150 to DN 200): PVC pressure pipe, PVC pressure fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 8. NPS 10 and NPS 12 (DN 250 and DN 300): Ductile -iron sewer pipe; standard- or compact - pattern, ductile -iron fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 9. NPS 10 and NPS 12 (DN 250 and DN 300): PVC pressure pipe; compact - pattern, ductile -iron fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and ' arrangement of underground sanitary sewerage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, 1 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 17 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 and couplings accordin to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements ang g cements, and other installation requirements. C. Install manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections, unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes ,r and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited. E. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed by tunneling, jacking, or combination of both. F. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following: 1 1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1 percent, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger with restrained joints at tee fittings and at changes in direction. Use corrosion - resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint system, or cast -in- place - concrete supports or anchors. 3. Install piping with 36 -inch (915 -mm) minimum cover. 4. Install piping below frost line. 5. Install hub -and- spigot, cast -iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook." 6. Install hubless cast -iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook." 7. Install ductile -iron, gravity sewer piping according to ASTM A 746. 8. Install ductile -iron and special fittings according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41. 9. Install stainless -steel drainage piping according to ASME A112.3.1. 10. Install ABS sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 11. Install PVC cellular -core piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 12. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 13. Install PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 14. Install fiberglass sewer piping according to ASTM D 3839 and ASTM F 1668. 15. Install nonreinforced - concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual." 16. Install reinforced- concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual." G. Install force -main, pressure piping according to the following: 1. Install piping with resitained joints at tee fittings and at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use corrosion- resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint system, or cast -in- place- concrete supports or anchors. 2. Install piping with 36 -inch (915 -mm) minimum cover. 3. Install piping below frost line. 4. Install ductile -iron pressure piping according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41. 5. Install ductile -iron special fittings according to AWWA C600. 6. Install PVC pressure piping according AWWA M23 or ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 1668. 7. Install PVC water - service piping according ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 1668. 1 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 18 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 H. Install P corrosion-protection piping in encasement over the following underground metal piping P according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105: 1. Hub -and- spigot, cast -iron soil pipe. 2. Hubless cast -iron soil pipe and fittings. ' 3. Ductile -iron pipe and fittings. 4. Special pipe fittings. I. Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag m piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops. 3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Basic piping joint construction is specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" Where specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions. B. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following: 1. Join hub -and- spigot, cast -iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints. 2. Join hub -and- spigot, cast -iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints. 3. Join hubless cast -iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless - coupling joints. 4. Join ductile -iron, gravity sewer piping according to AWWA C600 for push -on joints. 1 5. Join ductile -iron and special fittings according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41. 6. Join stainless -steel drainage piping according to ASME A112.3.1. 7. Join ABS sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 2751 for elastomeric - seal joints. 8. Join PVC cellular -core piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 891 for solvent - cemented joints. 9. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric - seal joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric- gasket joints. 10. Join PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 for elastomeric -seal joints or ASTM F 794 for gasketed joints. 11. Join fiberglass sewer piping according to ASTM D 4161 for elastomeric -seal joints. 12. Join nonreinforced- concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 14 and ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual" for rubber- gasket joints. 13. Join reinforced- concrete sewer piping according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual" for rubber- gasket joints. 14. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure -type, flexible or rigid couplings. 1 C. Join force -main, pressure piping according to the following: 1. Join ductile -iron pressure piping according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41 for push -on joints. 2. Join ductile -iron special fittings according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41 for push -on joints. 1 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 19 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 3. Join PVC pressure piping according AWWA M23 for gasketed joints. 4. Join PVC water - service piping according ASTM D 2855. 5. Join dissimilar pipe materials with pressure -type couplings. 3.5 MANHOLE INSTALLATION 1 A. General: Install manholes complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated. B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891. 1 C. Construct cast -in -place manholes as indicated. D. Install PE sheeting on earth where cast -in- place- concrete manholes are to be built. E. Install FRP manholes according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet. G. Set tops of frames and covers flush with fmished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 3 inches (76 mm) above finished surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated. H. Install manhole cover inserts in frame and immediately below cover. 1 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Place cast -in -place concrete according to ACI 318/318R. 3.7 BACKWATER VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install horizontal -type backwater valves in piping where indicated. B. Install combination horizontal and manual gate valve type in piping and in manholes where indicated. C. Install terminal -type backwater valves on end of piping and in manholes where indicated. Secure units to sidewalls. 3.8 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast -iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast -iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe. 1. Use light -duty, top - loading classification cleanouts in earth or unpaved foot -traffic areas. 2. Use medium -duty, top - loading classification cleanouts in paved foot -traffic areas. 3. Use heavy -duty, top - loading classification cleanouts in vehicle -traffic service areas. 4. Use extra -heavy -duty, top - loading classification cleanouts in roads. 1 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 20 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place-concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches (450 by 450 by 300 mm) deep. Set with tops 1 inch (25 mm) above surrounding grade. C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface. 3.9 CONNECTIONS A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping to building's sanitary building drains specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping." B. Connect pressure, force -main piping to building's sanitary force mains specified in Division 22 1 Section "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping." Terminate piping where indicated. C. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes. 1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting, plus 6 -inch (150 -mm) overlap, with not less than . 6 inches (150 mm) of concrete with 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa). 2. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20 (DN 100 to DN 500). Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye with not less than 6 inches (150 mm) of concrete with 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa). 3. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 21 (DN 525) or larger, or to underground manholes by cutting opening into existing unit large enough to allow 3 inches (76 mm) of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall, unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe or manhole wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches (150 mm) of concrete for minimum length of 12 inches (300 mm) to provide additional support of collar from connection to undisturbed I ground. a. Use concrete that will attain minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa), unless otherwise indicated. b. Use epoxy - bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and piping materials. 4. Protect existing piping and manholes to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate. D. Connect to grease or oil or sediment interceptors specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Interceptors." 3.10 CLOSING ABANDONED SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEMS A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below: FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 21 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 open ends of piping with at least 8 -inch- (200-mm-) thick, brick masonry Close ope a ds o p p g ( ) my bulkheads. 2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs. B. Abandoned Manholes: Excavate around manhole as required and use either procedure below: 1. Remove manhole and close open ends of remaining piping. 2. Remove top of manhole down to at least 36 inches (915 mm) below fmal grade. Fill to within 12 inches (300 mm) of top with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt. Fill to top with concrete. C. Backfill to grade according to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 1 3.11 PAINTING A. Clean and prepare concrete manhole surfaces for field painting. Remove loose efflorescence, chalk, dust, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen surface as required to remove glaze. Paint the following concrete surfaces as . recommended by paint manufacturer: 1. Cast -in- Place- Concrete Manholes: All exterior, except bottom and all interior. 2. Precast Concrete Manholes: All exterior and interior. B. Prepare ferrous frame and cover surfaces according to SSPC -PA 1 and paint according to SSPC -PA 1 and SSPC -Paint 16. Do not paint surfaces with foundry- applied corrosion- resistant coating. 3.12 IDENTIFICATION A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground manholes. 1. Use warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground manholes. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches (600 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. 1. Submit separate report : for each system inspection. 1 2. Defects requiring correction include the following: a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. 1 b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 22 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise . damaged piping. g PP g d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping. 3. within allowances specified. 4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory. B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects. 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 1 2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test. 5. Hydrostatic Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and the following: a. Allowable leakage is maximum of 50 gal. /inch of nominal pipe size per mile (4.6 L /millimeter of nominal pipe size per kilometer) of pipe, during 24 -hour period. b. Close openings in system and fill with water. c. Purge air and refill with water. d. Disconnect water supply. e. Test and inspect joints for leaks. f. Option: Test ductile -iron piping according to AWWA C600, "Hydrostatic Testing" Section. Use test pressure of at least 10 psig (69 kPa). 6. Air Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, UNI -B -6, and the following: a. Option: Test plastic gravity sewer piping according to ASTM F 1417. b. Option: Test concrete gravity sewer piping according to ASTM C 924 1 (ASTM C 924M). 7. Force Main: Perform hydrostatic test after thrust blocks, supports, and anchors have hardened. Test at pressure not less than 1 -1/2 times the maximum system operating pressure, but not less than 150 psig (1035 kPa). a. Ductile -Iron Piping: Test according to AWWA C600, "Hydraulic Testing" Section. b. PVC Piping: Test according to AWWA M23, "Testing and Maintenance" Chapter. 1 8. Manholes: Perform hydraulic test according to ASTM C 969 (ASTM C 969M). C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. N D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified. 1 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 23 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 3.14 CLEANING A. Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous material. Flush with potable water. 1 END OF SECTION 221313 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 24 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 I SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. II 1.2 SUMMARY I A. This Section includes the following: 1. Protecting existing trees on north property line per plans and to remain. 1 2. Removing existing trees, shrubs, groundcover, plants and grasses per plan. 3. Clearing and grubbing per plan. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil as located per grading and erosion control plan. 5. Removing above- and below -grade site improvements. I 6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities per plan. 7. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures. 1 B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Sustainable Design Requirements" for additional LEED a requirements. 2. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utilities, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities, and protect the temporary grading and erosion control plans per DEQ 1200C permit plan I set. 3. Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" for protecting trees remaining on -site that are affected by site operations. I 4. Division 01 Section "Execution" for verifying utility locations and for recording field measurements. 5. Division 02 Section "Structure Demolition" for demolition of buildings, structures, and I site improvements. 6. Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for partial demolition of buildings or structures undergoing alterations. II 7. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading. 8. Division 23 Section "Grasses and Plants" for finish grading including preparing and placing planting soil mixes and testing of topsoil material. 1.3 DEFINITIONS I A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface -soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than 1 SITE CLEARING 311000 - 1 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 Y g � Y � Y s P� �' � objects (50 mm) in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other non - soil materials. 1 B. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated. 1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP 1 A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and sate improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing. B. Record drawings, according to Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents," identifying and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 A. Pre - installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination. " 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1 A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site - clearing operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract. 1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect. C. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated. D. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing. 1 SITE CLEARING 311000 - 2 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 E. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place. PART 2 - PRODUCTS — Not Applicable 1 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 1 1. Obtain approved borrow soil materials off -site when satisfactory soil materials are not available on -site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during 1 construction. B. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated. C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. r 1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner. 3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil - bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, 1 according to Department of Environmental Quality (DEQ), Clean Water Services (CWS) and City of Tigard and per the 1200 -C Sediment and Erosion Control Plans/Permit specific to this site, that complies with EPA 832/R -92 -005 or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. r C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. 1 3.3 TREE PROTECTION A. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before starting site clearing. Remove fence when construction is complete. r SITE CLEARING 311000 - 3 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area. 2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area. 3. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash. B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated. C. Where excavation for new construction is required within tree protection zones, hand clear and 1 excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow -tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut: roots as close to excavation as possible. 1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected and covered with soil. 3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter with an emulsified asphalt or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. 4. Backfill with soil as soon as possible. D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect. 1. Employ an arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, to submit details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs. 2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full -growth status, as determined by Architect. 3.4 UTILITIES 1 A. Owner will arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures before site clearing, when requested by Contractor. 1. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing. 11 B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. 1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. 2. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor. C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others PI unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. D. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed. E. Removal of underground utilities is included in Division 21, Division 22, Division 23, Division 26, Division 27, and Division 28 Sections covering site utilities. SITE CLEARING 311000 - 4 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. 1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 3. Grind stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches (450 mm) below exposed sub grade. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone. 1 5. Chip removed tree branches and stockpile in areas approved by Civil Engineer or Architect and dispose of this material on -site as approved by Civil Engineer or Architect. B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material ' unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches (200 mm), and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. 3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. 1 1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials. C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches (1800 mm). 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones. 3. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal. 4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil. 3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS 1 A. Remove existing above- and below -grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. 1 B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated. 1. Unless existing full -depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw -cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw -cut faces vertically. 2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion. 1 SITE CLEARING 311000 - 5 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 DISPOSAL 1 3.8 A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, 1 and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable 1 materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. END OF SECTION 311000 1 1 1 .� 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SITE CLEARING 311000 - 6 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing subgrades for slabs -on- grade, walkways, pavements, lawns and grasses and exterior plants. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage course for slabs -on- grade. 4. Subbase course for concrete walkways and pavements. 1 5. Subbase and base course for asphalt paving. 6. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 7. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches. 8. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits for buried utility structures. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Allowances" for quantity allowance provisions related to unit -price rock excavation and authorized additional excavation. 2. Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" for unit -price rock excavation and authorized additional excavation provisions. 3. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation and Photographic Documentation" for recording preexcavation and earthwork progress. 4. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary controls, utilities, and support facilities. 1 5. Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" for protecting and trimming trees to remain. 6. Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for granular course if placed over vapor retarder and beneath the slab -on- grade. 7. Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, 27, and 28 Sections for installing underground mechanical and electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical structures. 8. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures, site stripping, grubbing, stripping, and stockpiling of topsoil, and removal of above- and below -grade improvements and utilities. 9. Division 31 Section "Dewatering" for lowering and disposing of ground water during construction. 10. Division 31 Section "Excavation Support and Protection" for shoring, bracing, and sheet piling of excavations. EARTH MOVING 312000 - 1 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 11. Division 31 Section "Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts" for excavation of shafts and disposal of surplus excavated material. 12. Division 32 Section "Turf and Grasses" for finish grading, including preparing and placing topsoil and planting soil for lawns. 13. Division 32 Section 'Plants" for planting bed establishment and tree and shrub pit excavation and planting. 14. Division 33 Section "Subdrainage" for drainage of foundations, slabs -on- grade, retaining walls, and landscaped areas. 1.3 UNIT PRICES A. Unit prices for earthwork are included in Division 01 Section "Unit Prices." 1 B. Quantity allowances for earthwork are included in Division 01 Section "Allowances." C. Rock Measurement: Volume of rock actually removed, measured in original position, but not to '- exceed the following. Unit prices for rock excavation include replacement with approved materials. 1. 24 inches (600 mm) outside of concrete forms other than at footings. 2. 12 inches (300 mm) outside of concrete forms at footings. 3. 6 inches (150 mm) outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade. 4. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without forms or exterior waterproofing treatments. 5. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath bottom of concrete slabs -on- grade. 6. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches (600 mm) wider than pipe or 42 inches (1065 mm) wide. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low- strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot -mix asphalt paving. 1 C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off -site for use as fill or backfill. E. Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab -on -grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water. F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1 EARTH MOVING 312000 - 2 i 1 MGA #053570 08/06 Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond Authorized Additional ca gr and y indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Civil Engineer or Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit price. 2. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and more than 30 feet (9 m) m length. 3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as 1 remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. 1 H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. (0.57 cu. m) for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following m size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted: 1 1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late - model, track - mounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42 -inch- (1065 -mm -) wide, maximum, short- tip- radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 138 -hp (103 -kW) flywheel power with bucket - curling force of not less than 28,090 lbf (125 kN) and stick -crowd force of not less than 18,650 lbf (83 kN); measured according to SAE J -1179. 2. Bulk Excavation: Late - model, track - mounted loader; rated at not less than 210 -hp (157 - kW) flywheel power and developing a minimum of 48,510 -lbf (216 -kN) breakout force 1 with a general - purpose bare bucket; measured according to SAE J -732. I. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. (0.57 cu. M) or more in volume that exceed a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows /2 inches (97 blows /50 mm) when tested by an independent geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586. 1 J. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. K. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot -mix asphalt pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement 1 concrete or hot -mix asphalt walk. L. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. M. Utilities: On -site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1 EARTH MOVING 312000 - 3 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 Each f plastic warning tape. ac type o p g p e. 2. Geotextile. 3. Controlled low- strength material, including design mixture. 4. Geofoam. B. Samples: 12 -by -12 -inch (300 -by- 300 -mm) Sample of subgrade geotextile. 1 C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on -site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each on -site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. D. Blasting Plan: For record purposes; approved by City of Tigard, Oregon. 1 E. Seismic Survey Report: For record purposes; from seismic survey agency. F. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction 1 and site improvements, including fmish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork begins. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Blasting: Comply with applicable requirements m NFPA 495, "Explosive Materials Code," and prepare a blasting plan reporting the following: 1. Types of explosive and sizes of charge to be used in each area of rock removal, types of blasting mats, sequence of blasting operations, and procedures that will prevent damage to site improvements and structures on Project site and adjacent properties. 2. Seismographic monitoring during blasting operations. 1 B. Seismic Survey Agency: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, experienced in seismic surveys and blasting procedures to perform the following services: 1. Report types of explosive and sizes of charge to be used in each area of rock removal, types of blasting mats, sequence of blasting operations, and procedures that will prevent damage to site improvements and structures on Project site and adjacent properties. 2. Seismographic monitoring during blasting operations. C. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock - definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548. 1 D. Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." EARTH MOVING 312000 - 4 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. 1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. 3. Contact utility- locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS 1 A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. 1 B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM/AASHTO M 145 Soil Classification Groups A -1, A -2 -4, A -2 -5, and A -3, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension, debris, 1 waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487 and A -2 -6, A -2 -7, A -4, A -5, A -6, and A -7 according to AASHTO M 145, or a combination of these groups. 1 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1 -1/2 -inch (37.5 -mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075 -mm) sieve. E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5 -mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075 -mm) sieve. 1 F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1 -1/2 -inch (37.5 -mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075 -mm) sieve. G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1 -inch (25 -mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075 -mm) sieve. 1 EARTH MOVING 312000 - 5 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 wl graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; H. Drainage Course: Narrowly gr gr , ASTM D 448; coarse - aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1 -1/2 -inch (37.5 - mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36 -mm) sieve. 1 I. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse - aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1- inch (25 -mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 (4.75 -mm) sieve. J. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand. K. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state. 2.2 GEOTEXTILES A. Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle - punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced: 1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. 2. Grab Tensile Strength: 157 lbf (700 N); ASTM D 4632. 3. Sewn Seam Strength: 142 lbf (630 N); ASTM D 4632. 4. Tear Strength: 56 lbf (250 N); ASTM D 4533. 5. Puncture Strength: 56 lbf (250 N); ASTM D 4833. 6. Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 (0.425 -mm) No. 60 (0.250 -mm) No. 70 (0.212 -mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 7. Permittivity: 0.5, 0.2, 0.1 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. 8. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355. B. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications, made from polyolefms or polyesters; with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced: 1 1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. 2. Grab Tensile Strength: 247 lbf (1100 N); ASTM D 4632. 3. Sewn Seam Strength: 222 lbf (990 N); ASTM D 4632. 4. Tear Strength: 90 lbf (400 N); ASTM D 4533. 5. Puncture Strength: 90 lbf (400 N); ASTM D 4833. 6. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 (0.250 -mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 7. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. 8. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355. 2.3 CONTROLLED LOW - STRENGTH MATERIAL A. Controlled Low- Strength Material: Low- density, self - compacting, flowable concrete material as follows: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type [I] [II] [or] [III]. 1 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. 1 EARTH MOVING 312000 - 6 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 3. Normal - Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. 4. Foaming Agent: ASTM C 869. 5. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M. 6. Air - Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Produce low- density, controlled low- strength material with the following physical properties: 1. As -Cast Unit Weight: 30 to 36 lb /cu. ft. (480 to 576 kg/cu. m) at point of placement, when tested according to ASTM C 138/C 138M. 2. Compressive Strength: 80 psi (550 kPa), when tested according to ASTM C 495. 1 C. Produce conventional- weight, controlled low- strength material with 80 -psi (550 -kPa) compressive strength when tested according to ASTM C 495. 1 2.4 GEOFOAM A. Extruded - Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV, 1.60 lb /cu. ft. (26 kg/cu. m) X, 1.30 lb/cu. ft. (21 kg/cu. m) VI, 1.80 lb/cu. ft. (29 kg/cu. m). 1 B. Molded - Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type I, 0.90 lb /cu. ft. (15 kg/cu. m) VIII, 1.15 lb /cu. ft. (18 kg/cu. m) II, 1.35 lb /cu. ft. (22 kg/cu. m). 1. Manufacture molded polystyrene with an inorganic mineral registered with the EPA and suitable for application as a termite deterrent. C. Geofoam Connectors: Geofoam manufacturer's multibarbed galvanized steel sheet connectors or Deformed steel reinforcing bars, 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali- resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) 1 thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows: B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali- resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored as follows: 1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems. 1 1 EARTH MOVING 312000 - 7 1 MGA #053570 08/06 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, 1 debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing." C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing," during earthwork operations. D. Provide protective insulating materials to protect subgrades and foundation soils against 1 freezing temperatures or frost. 3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 2. Install a dewatering system, specified in Division 31 Section "Dewatering," to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required. 1 3.3 EXPLOSIVES 1 A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. B. Explosives: Obtain written permission from authorities having jurisdiction before bringing 1 explosives to Project site or using explosives on Project site. 1. Perform blasting without damaging adjacent structures, property, or site improvements. 2. Perform blasting without weakening the bearing capacity of rock subgrade and with the least - practicable disturbance to rock to remain. 1 3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface 1 and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil 1 EARTH MOVING 312000 - 8 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions. 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. 2. Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without exceeding the following dimensions: a. 24 inches (600 mm) outside of concrete forms other than at footings. b. 12 inches (300 mm) outside of concrete forms at footings. c. 6 inches (150 mm) outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade. d. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without forms or exterior waterproofing treatments. e. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath bottom of concrete slabs on grade. f. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches (600 MM) wider than pipe or 42 inches (1065) wide. B. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be classified as earth and rock. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross sectioned by Architect. The Contract Sum will be adjusted for rock excavation according to unit prices included in the Contract Documents. Changes in the Contract time may be authorized for rock excavation. 1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation. a. Intermittent drilling; blasting, if permitted; ram hammering; or ripping of material not classified as rock excavation is earth excavation. 2. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock. Remove rock to lines and subgrade elevations indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without exceeding the following dimensions: 1 a. 4 inches (600 mm) outside of concrete forms other than at footings. b. 12 inches (300 mm) outside of concrete forms at footings. c. 6 inches (150 mm) outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade. d. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without forms or exterior waterproofing treatments. e. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath bottom of concrete slabs on grade. f. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches (600 mm) wider than pipe or 42 inches (1065 mm) wide. 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES 1 A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1 EARTH MOVING 312000 - 9 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 1 2. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations 6 to 12 inches (150 to 300 mm) above bottom of pile cap before piles are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced material. Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps. 3. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mr). Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces. 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS 1 A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. 1 3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. 1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below 1 frost line. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) each side of pipe or conduit or as indicated. 1 C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade. 1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter and flat- bottomed, multiple -duct conduit units, hand- excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. 2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches (150 mm) or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. 3. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. D. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches (100 mm) deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe. 1. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. 1 EARTH MOVING 312000 - 10 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 INSPECTION 3.8 SUBGRADE IN S 1 A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade. B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with 1 compacted backfill or fill material as directed. C. Proof -roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with heavy pneumatic -tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof -roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1. Completely proof -roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof - rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h). 2. Proof -roll with a loaded 10- wheel, tandem -axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons (13.6 tonnes). 3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed. D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit price. E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or 1 construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation. 1 3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28 -day compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.2 MPa), may be used when approved by Architect. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect. 3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 1 3.11 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1 1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. EARTH MOVING 312000 - 11 1 MGA #053570 08/06 inspecting 3. Testing and sp ing underground u tilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL 1 A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. C. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450 mm) of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete and Miscellaneous Cast -in -Place Concrete." D. Provide 4 -inch- (100 -mm -) thick, concrete -base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 1 inches (750 mm) below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase. E. Place and compact initial backfill of sub base material or satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or conduit. 1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. F. Controlled Low- Strength Material: Place initial backfill of controlled low- strength material to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or conduit. G. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing. H. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation. I. Controlled Low - Strength Material: Place final backfill of controlled low- strength material to 1 final subgrade elevation. J. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 1 1 EARTH MOVING 312000 - 12 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 3.13 SOIL FILL 1 A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. 1 B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill. C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.14 GEOFOAM FILL A. Place a leveling course of sand, 2 inches (50 mm) thick, over subgrade. Finish leveling course to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested with a 10 -foot (3 -m) straightedge. 1. Place leveling course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. ' B. Install geofoam blocks in layers with abutting edges and ends and with the long dimension of each block at right angles to blocks in each subsequent layer. Offset joints of blocks in 1 successive layers. C. Install geofoam connectors at each layer of geofoam to resist horizontal displacement according to geofoam manufacturer's written instructions. D. Cover geofoam with sub drainage geotextile before placing overlying soil materials. 3.15 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1 1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that 1 exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 1 3.16 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth 1 for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand - operated tampers. 1 EARTH MOVING 312000 - 13 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and Y q uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent. 4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85 percent. 1 3.17 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply 1 with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 1 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm) 1 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm) 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm). C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested with a 10 -foot (3 -m) straightedge. 3.18 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE A. Subdrainage Pipe: Specified in Division 33 Section "Subdrainage." 1 B. Subsurface Drain: Place subsurface drainage geotextile around perimeter of subdrainage trench. Place a 6 -inch (150 -mm) course of filter material on subsurface drainage geotextile to support subdrainage pipe. Encase subdrainage pipe m a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) of filter material, placed m compacted layers 6 inches (150 mm) thick, and wrap in subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches (150 mm). 1 1. Compact each filter material layer with a minimum of two passes of a plate -type vibratory compactor. 1 EARTH MOVING 312000 - 14 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 C. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated, to within 12 inches (300 mm) of final subgrade, in compacted layers 6 inches (150 mm) thick. Overlay drainage backfill with 1 layer of subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches (150 mm). 1. Compact each filter material layer with a minimum of two passes of a plate -type vibratory compactor. 2. Place and compact impervious fill over drainage backfill in 6 -inch- (150 -mm -) thick compacted layers to fmal subgrade. 3.19 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES A. Place sub base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 1 B. On prepared sub grade, place sub base course under pavements and walks as follows: 1. Install separation geotextile on prepared sub grade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. 2. Place base course material over sub base course under hot -mix asphalt pavement. 3. Shape sub base course to required crown elevations and cross -slope grades. 4. Place sub base course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 5. Place sub base course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick. 6. Compact sub base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. 1 C. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches (300 mm) wide, of satisfactory soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. 1 3.20 DRAINAGE COURSE A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. ' B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast -in -place concrete slabs - on -grade as follows: 1 1. Install subdrainage geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. 2. Place drainage course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. ' 3. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick. 4. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 1 EARTH MOVING 312000 - 15 1 MGA #053570 08/06 QUALITY FIELD UALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing 1 agency to perform field quality- control testing. B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed 1 to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect. D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1 test for every 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than 3 tests. 2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 100 feet (30 m) or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests. 3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 150 feet (46 m) or less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests. E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.22 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of fmished surfacing to match adjacent work, 111 and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 1 1 EARTH MOVING 312000 - 16 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 3.23 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS 1 A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. B. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect. 1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. 1 END OF SECTION 312000 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EARTH MOVING 312000 - 17 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 SECTION 312319 - DEWATERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 L1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes construction dewatering. B. Related Sections: 1 1. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation and Photographic Documentation" for recording preexisting conditions and dewatering system progress. 2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, backfilling, site grading, and for site ' utilities. 3. Division 31 Section "Excavation Support and Protection" for shoring, bracing, and sheet piling of excavations. ' 4. Division 33 Section "Subdrainage" for permanent foundation wall, underfloor, and footing drainage. 1 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Dewatering Performance: Design, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and maintain dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control hydrostatic pressures and to lower, control, remove, and dispose of ground water and permit excavation and construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades. 1. Delegated Design: Design dewatering system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design ' criteria indicated. 2. Continuously monitor and maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion control, stability of excavations and constructed slopes, that excavation does not flood, and that damage to subgrades and permanent structures is prevented. 3. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means. 4. Accomplish dewatering without damaging existing buildings, structures, and site improvements adjacent to excavation. 1 5. Remove dewatering system when no longer required for construction. 1 1 DEWATERING 312319 - 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For dewatering system. Show arrangement, locations, and details of wells and well points; locations of risers, headers, filters, pumps, power units, and discharge lines; and means of discharge, control of sediment, and disposal of water. 1. Include layouts of piezometers and flow - measuring devices for monitoring performance 1 of dewatering system. 2. Include a written plan for dewatering operations including control procedures to be adopted if dewatering problems arise. B. Delegated - Design Submittal: For dewatering system indicated to comply with performance . requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified 1 professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, land surveyor, and professional engineer. 1 D. Field quality - control reports. E. Other Informational Submittals: 1 1. Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by dewatering operations. 1 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer that has specialized in design of dewatering systems and dewatering work. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning dewatering. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1 C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to dewatering including, but not limited to, the 1 following: a. Inspection and discussion of condition of site to be dewatered including 1 coordination with temporary erosion control measures and temporary controls and protections. b. Geotechnical report. 1 c. Proposed site clearing and excavations. d. Existing utilities and subsurface conditions. e. Coordination for interruption, shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. f. Construction schedule. Verify availability of Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. g. Testing and monitoring of dewatering system. 1 DEWATERING 312319 - 2 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1 A. Interruption of Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt any utility serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect, Construction Manager, and Owner no fewer than two (2) days m advance of proposed interruption of utility. ' 2. Do not proceed with interruption of utility without Architect's, Construction Manager's, and Owner's written permission. B. Project -Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is ' available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or 1 conclusions drawn from this data. 1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for ' dewatering. 2. The geotechnical report is included elsewhere in the Project Manual. ' C. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey adjacent existing buildings, structures, and site improvements, establishing exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations. ' 1. During dewatering, regularly resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent 1 construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 1 A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by dewatering operations. 1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding site and surrounding area. ' 2. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1 B. Install dewatering system to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1 DEWATERING 312319 - 3 1 MGA #053570 08/06 not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities adjacent occu 1. Do of c adjacent p without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Provide temporary grading to facilitate dewatering and control of surface water. 1 D. Monitor dewatering systems continuously. E. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering. 1 F. Protect and maintain temporary erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" and Division 31 Section "Site 1 Clearing" during dewatering operations. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install dewatering system utilizing wells, well points, or similar methods complete with pump equipment, standby power and pumps, filter material gradation, valves, appurtenances, water disposal, and surface -water controls. 1. Space well points or wells at intervals required to provide sufficient dewatering. , 2. Use filters or other means to prevent pumping of fine sands or silts from the subsurface. B. Before excavating below ground -water level, place system into operation to lower water to specified levels. Operate system continuously until drains, sewers, and structures have been constructed and fill materials have been placed or until dewatering is no longer required. C. Provide an adequate system to lower and control ground water to permit excavation, construction of structures, and placement of fill materials on dry subgrades. Install sufficient dewatering equipment to drain water - bearing strata above and below bottom of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations. 1. Do not permit open -sump pumping that leads to loss of fines, soil piping, subgrade softening, and slope instability. 1 D. Reduce hydrostatic head in water - bearing strata below subgrade elevations of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations. 1. Maintain piezometric water level a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) below surface of excavation. E. Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner that avoids endangering public health, property, and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water and sediment in a manner that avoids inconvenience to others. Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other flow - control devices as required by authorities having jurisdiction. F. Provide standby equipment on site, installed and available for immediate operation, to maintain dewatering on continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails. If dewatering 1 DEWATERING 312319 - 4 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 fi due to inadequacy or failure of dewatering system, requirements are not satisfied q y g y , restore damaged structures and foundation soils at no additional expense to Owner. 1. Remove dewatering system from Project site on completion of dewatering. Plug or fill well holes with sand or cut off and cap wells a minimum of 36 inches (900 mm) below 1 overlying construction. G. Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering operations. I Q FIELD 3.3 UALITY CONTROL 3 1 A. Observation Wells: Provide, take measurements, and maintain at least the minimum number of observation wells or piezometers indicated; additional observation wells may be required by authorities having jurisdiction. r 1. Observe and record daily elevation of ground water and piezometric water levels in observation wells. ' 2. Repair or replace, within 24 hours, observation wells that become inactive, damaged, or destroyed. In areas where observation wells are not functioning properly, suspend construction activities until reliable observations can be made. Add or remove water from observation -well risers to demonstrate that observation wells are functioning ' properly. 3. Fill observation wells, remove piezometers, and fill holes when dewatering is completed. B. Provide continual observation to ensure that subsurface soils are not being removed by the dewatering operation. 111 END OF SECTION 312319 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DEWATERING 312319 - 5 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 SECTION 315000 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY 1 A. Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems. B. Related Sections: 1 1. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation and Photographic Documentation" for recording preexisting conditions and excavation support and protection system progress. 2. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utilities and support facilities. 3. Division 31 Section "Dewatering" for dewatering system for excavations. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1 A. Design, furnish, install, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection system capable of supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting soil and hydrostatic pressure and superimposed and construction loads. ' 1. Delegated Design: Design excavation support and protection system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using ' performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means. 3. Install excavation support and protection systems without damaging existing buildings, ' structures, and site improvements adjacent to excavation. 4. Monitor vibrations, settlements, and movements. 1 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For excavation support and protection system. B. Delegated- Design Submittal: For excavation support and protection system indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 315000 - 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 Coordinate first paragraph below with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section re C. q q "Quality Requirements. "Qualification Data: For qualified land surveyor and professional engineer. , D. Other Informational Submittals: 1. Photographs and Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjacent construction and site ' improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by the absence of, the installation of, or the performance of excavation support and protection systems. Submit before Work begins. 2. Record Drawings: Identifying and locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions. a. Note locations and capping depth of wells and well points. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to excavation support and protection system including, but not limited to, the following: a. Geotechnical report. b. Existing utilities and subsurface conditions. c. Proposed excavations. d. Proposed equipment. e. Monitoring of excavation support and protection system. f. Working area location and stability. g. Coordination with waterproofing. h. Abandonment or removal of excavation support and protection system. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt any utility serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect, Construction Manager, and Owner no fewer than two (2) days in advance of proposed interruption of utility. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of utility without Architect's, Construction Manager's, and Owner's written permission. B. Project -Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from the data. EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 315000 - 2 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for excavation support and protection. 1 2. The geotechnical report is included elsewhere in the Project Manual. C. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey adjacent existing buildings, structures, and site improvements; establish exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations. ' 1. During installation of excavation support and protection systems, regularly resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations and positions for comparison with original elevations and positions. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations or positions occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent ' construction. 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that are either new or in serviceable condition. 1 B. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 690/A 690M, or ASTM A 992/A 992M. C. Steel Sheet Piling: ASTM A 328/A 328M, ASTM A 572/A 572M, or ASTM A 690/A 690M; 1 with continuous interlocks. 1. Corners: [Site - fabricated mechanical interlock] [Roll- formed corner shape with ' continuous interlock]. D. Wood Lagging: Lumber, mixed hardwood, nominal rough thickness of size and strength required for application - 4 inches (100 mm). ' E. Shotcrete: Comply with Division 03 Section "Shotcrete" for shotcrete materials and mixes, reinforcement, and shotcrete application. F. Cast -in -Place Concrete: ACI 301, of compressive strength required for application. ' G. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. H. Tiebacks: Steel bars, ASTM A 722/A 722M. 1 I. Tiebacks: Steel strand, ASTM A 416/A 416M. 1 1 1 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 315000 - 3 1 MGA #053570 08/06 PAR T 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop during excavation support and protection system operations. 1. Shore, support, and protect utilities encountered. 1 B. Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide altemate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction so that forming and finishing of concrete surfaces are not impeded. D. Monitor excavation support and protection systems daily during excavation progress and for as 111 long as excavation remains open. Promptly correct bulges, breakage, or other evidence of movement to ensure that excavation support and protection systems remain stable. E. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installing excavation support and protection systems. 3.2 SOLDIER PILES AND LAGGING A. Install steel soldier piles before starting excavation. Extend soldier piles below excavation grade level to depths adequate to prevent lateral movement. Space soldier piles at regular intervals not to exceed allowable flexural strength of wood lagging. Accurately align exposed faces of flanges to vary not more than 2 inches (50 mm) from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment. B. Install wood lagging within flanges of soldier piles as excavation proceeds. Trim excavation as required to install lagging. Fill voids behind lagging with soil, and compact. C. Install wales horizontally at locations indicated on Drawings and secure to soldier piles. 3.3 SHEET PILING A. Before starting excavation, install one -piece sheet piling lengths and tightly interlock to form a 1 continuous barrier. Accurately place the piling, using templates and guide frames unless otherwise recommended in writing by the sheet piling manufacturer. Limit vertical offset of adjacent sheet piling to 60 inches (1500 mm). Accurately align exposed faces of sheet piling to vary not more than 2 inches (50 mm) from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment. Cut tops of sheet piling to uniform elevation at top of excavation. EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 315000 - 4 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 3.4 TIEBACKS 1 A. Tiebacks: Drill, install, grout, and tension tiebacks. Test load - carrying capacity of each tieback and replace and retest deficient tiebacks. 1. Test loading shall be observed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for design of excavation support and protection system. 2. Maintain tiebacks in place until permanent construction is able to withstand lateral soil 1 and hydrostatic pressures. ' 3.5 BRACING A. Bracing: Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other permanent work. If necessary to move brace, install new bracing before removing original brace. 1. Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete work unless otherwise approved by Architect. ' 2. Install internal bracing, if required, to prevent spreading or distortion of braced frames. 3. Maintain bracing until structural elements are supported by other bracing or until permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures. 3.6 REMOVAL AND REPAIRS ' A. Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed sufficiently to support excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to avoid disturbing underlying soils or damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities. 1 1. Remove excavation support and protection systems to a minimum depth of 48 inches (1200 mm) below overlaying construction and abandon remainder. 2. Fill voids immediately with approved backfill compacted to density specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3. Repair or replace, as approved by Architect, adjacent work damaged or displaced by removing excavation support and protection systems. ' B. Leave excavation support and protection systems permanently in place. END OF SECTION 315000 1 1 1 1 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION 315000 - 5 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT PAVING 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. Section Includes: 1. Cold milling of existing hot -mix asphalt pavement. ' 2. Hot -mix asphalt patching. 3. Hot -mix asphalt paving. 4. Hot -mix asphalt paving overlay. 5. Asphalt surface treatments. 6. Pavement - marking paint. 7. Traffic - calming devices. 8. Imprinted asphalt. ' B. Related Sections: ' 1. Division 02 Section "Structure Demolition" for demolition, removal, and recycling of existing asphalt pavements, and for geotextiles that are not embedded within courses of asphalt paving. 2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for aggregate subbase and base courses and for ' aggregate pavement shoulders. 3. Division 32 Sections for other paving installed as part of crosswalks in asphalt pavement areas. ' 4. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants and fillers at paving terminations. 5. Division 32 Section "Unit Paving" for bituminous setting bed for pavers. ' 1.3 UNIT PRICES 1 A. Work of this Section is affected by square yards. 1 1.4 DEFINITION A. Hot -Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms. 1 1 ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. 1. Job -Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix proposed for the Work. 2. Job -Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pavement markings, lane separations, and defined parking spaces. 1 Indicate, with international symbol of accessibility, spaces allocated for people with disabilities. C. Samples: For each paving fabric, 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm) minimum. 1 D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Each paving fabric, 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm) minimum. 2. Each type and color of preformed traffic- calming device. 1 3. Each pattern and color of imprinted asphalt and precut marking material. E. Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer and Installer. F. Material Certificates: For each paving material, from manufacturer. G. Material Test Reports: For each paving material. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving -mix manufacturer registered with and approved by City of Tigard and ODOT is required for this project. B. Installer Qualifications: Imprinted- asphalt manufacturer's authorized installer who is trained and approved for installation of imprinted asphalt required for this Project. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated. 1 D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of LanPacific, Inc. approved civil engineering site plans of City of Tigard and ODOT for asphalt paving work. 1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard ' specifications do not apply to this Section. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to hot -mix asphalt paving including, but not limited to, the following: a. Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location of plant that will manufacture hot -mix asphalt. ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 2 1 MGA #053570 08/06 condition of subgrade and preparatory b. Review gr p p ry work. c. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic ' during installation period and for remainder of construction period. d. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid 1 delays. ' 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pavement - marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material, date of 1 manufacture, and directions for storage. B. Store pavement - marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location within temperature range 1 required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following conditions are not met: 1. Prime Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C). 2. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C). 3. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations in ASTM D 3910. 4. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and rising at time of placement. 5. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C) at time of placement. 1 B. Pavement - Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for oil -based materials and 55 deg F (12.8 deg C) for water -based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C). ' C. Imprinted Asphalt Paving: Proceed with coating imprinted pavement only when air temperature is at least 50 deg F (10 deg C) and rising and will not drop below 50 deg F (10 deg C) within 8 ' hours of coating application. Proceed only if no precipitation is expected within two hours after applying the final layer of coating. 1 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 AGGREGATES A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous ' installations. B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or cured, 111 crushed blast - furnace slag. ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 3 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM D 1073 or AASHTO M 29, sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared P P from stone, gravel, cured blast - furnace slag, or combinations thereof. 1. For hot -mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total aggregate mass. D. Mineral Filler: ASTM D 242 or AASHTO M 17, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other 1 inert material. 2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO M 320 or AASHTO MP la, PG 64 -22, PG 58 -28, or PG 70 -22]. 1 B. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381 for viscosity- graded material and ASTM D 946 for penetration - graded material. C. Prime Coat: ASTM D 2027, medium - curing cutback asphalt, MC -30 or MC -70 and MC -250. D. Prime Coat: Asphalt emulsion prime coat complying with City of Tigard and ODOT requirements. E. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977 or AASHTO M 140 emulsified asphalt, or ASTM D 2397 or AASHTO M 208 cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application. F. Fog Seal: ASTM D 977 or AASHTO M 140 emulsified asphalt, or ASTM D 2397 or AASHTO M 208 cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, factory diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application. G. Water: Potable. H. Undersealing Asphalt: ASTM D 3141, pumping consistency. 1 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA. Provide in granular, liquid, or wettable powder form. B. Sand: ASTM D 1073 or AASHTO M 29, Grade Nos. 2 or 3. C. Paving Geotextile: AASHTO M 288, nonwoven polypropylene; resistant to chemical attack, rot, and mildew; and specifically designed for paving applications. D. Joint Sealant: ASTM D 6690 or AASHTO M 324, Type I, Type II or III, Type IV, hot - applied, single- component, polymer - modified bituminous sealant. E. Pavement - Marking Paint: Alkyd -resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying 1 with AASHTO M 248, Type N, Type F, Type S; colors complying with FS TT -P -1952. 1. Color: As indicated. 1 ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 4 1 MGA #053570 08/06 - Paint: MPI #32 Alkyd Traffic Markin F. Pavement Marking llcy Marking Paint. 1. Color: As indicated. G. Pavement - Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, ' complying with FS TT -P -1952, Type II, with drying time of less than three 45 minutes. 1. Color: As indicated. H. Pavement - Marking Paint: MPI #97 Latex Traffic Marking Paint. 1. Color: As indicated. ' I. Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type 1. ' J. Wheel Stops: Precast, air - entrained concrete, 2500 -psi (17.2 -MPa) minimum compressive strength, 4 -1/2 inches (115 mm) high by 9 inches (225 mm) wide by 72 inches (1800 mm) long. Provide chamfered corners, drainage slots on underside, and holes for anchoring to substrate. 1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) diameter, 10 -inch (254 -mm) minimum length. ' K. Wheel Stops: Solid, integrally colored, 96 percent recycled HDPE or commingled postconsumer and postindustrial recycled plastic; UV stabilized; 4 inches (100 mm) high by 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 72 inches (1800 mm) long. Provide chamfered corners, drainage slots ' on underside, and holes for anchoring to substrate. 1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) diameter, 10 -inch (254 -mm) minimum ' length. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by wheel -stop manufacturer for application to asphalt pavement. 2.4 PREFORMED TRAFFIC- CALMING DEVICES ' A. Speed Bumps, Humps, Cushions: Solid, integrally colored, 100 percent postconsumer or commingled postconsumer and postindustrial recycled rubber or plastic; UV stabilized. Provide holes for anchoring to substrate. ' 1. Size: Modular bumps 2 inches (51 mm) high by 10 inches (254 mm) wide by 72 inches (1800 mm) long, with overall length as dimensioned on Drawings. 2. Size: Modular assemblies 3 inches (76 mm) high by 12 feet (3.7 m) in overall width or 4 ' inches (102 mm) high by 14 feet (4.3 m) in overall width, with overall length as dimensioned on Drawings. 3. Mounting Hardware: Galvanized -steel spike, 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) diameter, 10 -inch (254- ' mm) minimum length, lag screw, shield, and washers; 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) diameter, 8 -inch (203 -mm) minimum length, hardware as standard with device manufacturer]. 4. Adhesive: As recommended by device manufacturer. ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 5 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2.5 IMPRINTED ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Templates: Imprinted- asphalt manufacturer's standard flexible templates for imprinting pattern 1 into hot asphalt paving. 1. Pattern: Custom pattern indicated on Drawings. 1 B. Coating System: Imprinted- asphalt manufacturer's standard system formulated for exterior application on asphalt paving surfaces. 1. Base Coating: Portland cement and epoxy - modified acrylic polymer blended with sand and aggregate, formulated for exterior application on asphalt paving surfaces. 2. Top Coating: Epoxy- modified acrylic polymer blended with sand and aggregate, 1 formulated for exterior application on asphalt paving surfaces. 3. Colorant: UV- stable pigment blend, added to each coating layer. 4. Color: As indicated on drawings. 1 C. Precut Marking Material: Imprinted- asphalt manufacturer's standard, reflectorized, thermoplastic, 90 -mil (2.3 -mm) minimum thickness, formulated for exterior application on asphalt paving surfaces, and matching the imprinted pattern of templates. 2.6 MIXES 1 A. Hot -Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot -laid, hot -mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities having jurisdiction; designed according to procedures in AI MS -2, "Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot -Mix Types "; and complying with the following requirements: 1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is located. 2. Base Course: Class B. 3. Surface Course: Class C. B. Hot - Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot laid, hot - mix asphalt plant mixes approved by City of Tigard and designed according to procedures in Al MS -2, "Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot -Mix Types." ' 1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is located. 2. Provide mixes complying with composition, grading, and tolerance requirements in ASTM D 3515 for the following nominal, maximum aggregate sizes: a. Base Course: 1 inch (25 mm)]. 1 b. Surface Course: 1/2 inch (13 mm). C. Emulsified- Asphalt Slurry: ASTM D 3910, Type 1, Type 2, Type 3. ' 1 ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 6 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 1 A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to begin paving. B. Proof -roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic -tired equipment to identify soft ' pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof -roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1. Completely proof -roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof - rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h). ' 2. Proof roll with a loaded 10- wheel, tandem -axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons (13.6 tonnes). 3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as 1 determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed. C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1 D. Verify that utilities, traffic loop detectors, and other items requiring a cut and installation beneath the asphalt surface have been completed and that asphalt surface has been repaired flush with adjacent asphalt prior to beginning installation of imprinted asphalt. 3.2 COLD MILLING 1 A. Clean existing pavement surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before cold milling. Remove existing asphalt pavement by cold milling to grades and cross sections ' indicated. 1. Mill to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm). 2. Mill to a uniform finished surface free of excessive gouges, grooves, and ridges. ' 3. Control rate of milling to prevent tearing of existing asphalt course. 4. Repair or replace curbs, manholes, and other construction damaged during cold milling. 5. Excavate and trim unbound- aggregate base course, if encountered, and keep material ' separate from milled hot -mix asphalt. 6. Transport milled hot -mix asphalt to asphalt recycling facility. 7. Keep milled pavement surface free of loose material and dust. 1 3.3 PATCHING 1 A. Hot -Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches (300 mm) into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound- aggregate base course to form new subgrade. ' B. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement: Break cracked slabs and roll as required to reseat concrete pieces firmly. 1 ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 7 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1. Pump hot undersealing asphalt under rocking slab until slab is stabilized or, if necessary, P g P g � �'� crack slab into pieces and roll to reseat pieces firmly. 2. Remove disintegrated or badly cracked pavement. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal 1 patches, extending into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Recompact existing unbound- aggregate base course to form new subgrade. 1 C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot -mix asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal. /sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L /sq. m). 1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot -mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. 1 Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces. D. Patching: Fill excavated pavements with hot -mix asphalt base mix for full thickness of patch and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface. E. Patching: Partially fill excavated pavements with hot -mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot -mix surface layer finished flush with adjacent surfaces. 3.4 REPAIRS 1 A. Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of hot -mix asphalt surface course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 1 inch (25 mm) in existing pavements. 1 1. Install leveling wedges in compacted lifts not exceeding 3 inches (75 mm) thick. B. Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing joint filler material from cracks or joints to a depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm). 1. Clean cracks and joints in existing hot -mix asphalt pavement. 1 2. Use emulsified- asphalt slurry to seal cracks and joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide. Fill flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess. 3. Use hot - applied joint sealant to seal cracks and joints more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide. Fill flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess. 3.5 SURFACE PREPARATION 1 A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving. 1 B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted- aggregate base before applying paving materials. 1. Mix herbicide with prime coat if formulated by manufacturer for that purpose. 1 ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 8 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 C. Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound- aggregate base course at a rate of 0.15 to 0.50 gal. /sq. yd. (0.7 to 2.3 L /sq. m). Apply enough material to penetrate and 1 seal but not flood surface. Allow prime coat to cure. 1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over surface to blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic. Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have evaporated. 2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving. 1 D. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal. /sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L /sq. m). 1 1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot -mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces. 3.6 PAVING GEOTEXTILE INSTALLATION 1 A. Apply tack coat uniformly to existing pavement surfaces at a rate of 0.20 to 0.30 gal. /sq. yd. (0.8 to 1.2 L /sq. m). B. Place paving geotextile promptly according to manufacturer's written instructions. Broom or roll geotextile smooth and free of wrinkles and folds. Overlap longitudinal joints 4 inches (100 mm) and transverse joints 6 inches (150 min). 1. Protect paving geotextile from traffic and other damage and place hot -mix asphalt paving overlay the same day. 1 3.7 HOT -MIX ASPHALT PLACING 1 A. Machine place hot -mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted. 1. Place hot -mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated. 2. Place hot -mix asphalt surface course in single lift. ' 3. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F (121 deg C). 4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of one -way slopes unless otherwise indicated. 5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears in asphalt - paving mat. B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet (3 m) wide unless infill edge strips of a 1 lesser width are required. 1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to ' overlap previous strips. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt surface course. 1 ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 9 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 irregularities in avin course behind C. Promptly correct surface paving paver. Use suitable hand tools p to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot -mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface. 1 3.8 JOINTS 1 A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot -mix asphalt course. 1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm). 4. Construct transverse joints at each point where paver ends a clay's work and resumes work at a subsequent time. Construct these joints using either "bulkhead" or "papered" method according to AI MS -22, for both "Ending a Lane" and "Resumption of Paving Operations. ", and as shown on Drawings. 5. Compact joints as soon as hot -mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. 6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density. 3.9 COMPACTION A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot -mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot -mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory- plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. 1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F (85 deg C). B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements. C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot -mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot -mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density: 1. Average Density: 96 percent of reference laboratory density according to ASTM D 6927 1 or AASHTO T 245, but not less than 94 percent nor greater than 100 percent. 2. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to 1 ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent. D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot -mix asphalt is still warm. 1 E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly. 1 ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 10 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot -mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness. G. Protection: After fmal rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened. H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become 1 marked. ' 3.10 ASPHALT CURBS A. Construct hot mix asphalt curbs over compacted pavement surfaces. Apply a light tack coat unless pavement surface is still tacky and free from dust. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F (121 deg C). 1. Asphalt Mix: Same as pavement surface - course mix. 1 B. Place hot -mix asphalt to curb cross section indicated or, if not indicated, to local standard shapes, by machine or by hand in wood or metal forms. Tamp hand - placed materials and screed to smooth finish. Remove forms after hot -mix asphalt has cooled. 3.11 ASPHALT TRAFFIC - CALMING DEVICES 1 A. Construct hot -mix asphalt speed bumps, humps, cushions, and, tables over compacted pavement surfaces. Apply a tack coat unless pavement surface is still tacky and free from dust. Spread ' mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F (121 deg C). 1. Tack Coat Application: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal. /sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L /sq. m). ' 2. Asphalt Mix: Same as pavement surface - course mix. 3. Before installation, mill pavement that will be in contact with bottom of traffic- calming device. Mill to a depth of 1 inch (25 mm) from top of pavement to a clean, rough profile. 1 B. Place hot -mix asphalt to cross section indicated, by machine or by hand m wood or metal forms. Tamp hand- placed materials and screed to smooth finish. Remove forms after hot -mix asphalt 1 has cooled. ' 3.12 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances: 1 1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm). 2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus. 1 B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10 -foot (3 -m) straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 11 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1. Base Course: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch (6 mrn). C. Traffic- Calming Devices: Compact and form asphalt to produce the contour indicated and within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) of height indicated above pavement surface. 3.13 SURFACE TREATMENTS 1 A. Fog Seals: Apply fog seal at a rate of 0.10 to 0.15 gal. /sq. yd. (0.45 to 0.7 L /sq. m) to existing asphalt pavement and allow to cure. With fine sand, lightly dust areas receiving excess fog seal. 1 B. Slurry Seals: Apply slurry coat in a uniform thickness according to ASTM D 3910 and allow to cure. 1 1. Roll slurry seal to remove ridges and provide a uniform, smooth surface. 3.14 PAVEMENT MARKING A. Do not apply pavement - marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect. B. Allow paving to age for 30 days before starting pavement marking. C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils (0.4 mm). 1. Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 lb /gal. (0.72 kg/L). 1 3.15 WHEEL STOPS A. Install wheel stops in bed of adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. 1 B. Securely attach wheel stops to pavement with not less than two galvanized -steel dowels embedded at one - quarter to one -third points. Securely install dowels into pavement and bond to 111 wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop. 3.16 PREFORMED TRAFFIC- CALMING DEVICES 1 A. Install preformed speed bumps in bed of adhesive as recommended by manufacturer for heavy traffic. 1 ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 12 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 B. Securely attach preformed speed bumps to pavement with hardware spaced as recommended by manufacturer for heavy traffic. Recess head of hardware beneath top surface. 3.17 IMPRINTING ASPHALT 1 A. General: Imprint asphalt according to manufacturer's written instructions, using manufacturer's recommended equipment. 1 B. Freshly Laid Asphalt: Immediately after asphalt has been laid and compacted but still plastic, begin the surface imprinting process. 1 1. Monitor asphalt surface temperature in compliance with manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure required temperature to perform surface imprinting. 2. Reheat asphalt if surface temperature drops below that required. ' C. Reheating Asphalt: Soften asphalt pavement surface by heating to a depth of at least 1/2 inch (13 mm) without burning asphalt. 1 1. Heat to a temperature of 300 to 325 deg F (149 to 163 deg C) immediately before applying templates. 2. Regularly monitor the pavement temperature to prevent overheating. ' 3. Direct flame heaters are not permitted. 4. If pavement is overheated and begins to emit black smoke, remove damaged pavement by milling down 1 inch (25 mm) and replace removed pavement with new, compacted 1 surface course prior to resuming imprinting work. D. Surface Imprinting: Apply and imprint templates to a minimum depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) or as 1 required to embed precut marking material flush or barely beneath pavement surface. E. Coating Application: After imprinted surface has cooled, apply two layers of base coating followed by two layers of top coating. Do not allow traffic until coating has completely dried ' and cured. F. Precut Marking Material Application: Position precut marking material aligned with imprinted 1 pattem and slowly heat to a temperature no higher than 325 deg F (163 deg C) until marking material begins to liquefy and flow. Do not allow traffic until installed marking material has cooled to ambient temperature. 1 3.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1 A. Testing Agency: Contractor to engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Thickness: In -place compacted thickness of hot -mix asphalt courses will be determined according to ASTM D 3549. ' C. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot -mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances. 1 ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 13 1 MGA #053570 08/06 D. Traffic-Calming Devices: Finished height of asphalt speed bumps above pavement will be g g P P P P measured for compliance with tolerances. E. In -Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of =compacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement according to ASTM D 979 or AASHTO T 168. 1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from 1 four samples of hot -mix asphalt - paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job -mix specifications. 2. In -place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726. a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. (836 sq. m) or less of installed pavement, with no fewer than 3 cores taken. b. Field density of in -place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726. F. Replace and compact hot -mix asphalt where core tests were taken. G. Remove and replace or install additional hot -mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. 3.19 DISPOSAL A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and 1 legally dispose of them in an EPA - approved landfill. 1. Do not allow milled materials to accumulate on -site. 1 END OF SECTION 321216 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 14 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY 1 A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following: 1. Driveways and roadways. ' 2. Parking lots. 3. Curbs and gutters. 4. Walkways. 5. Unit paver base. ' B. Related Sections include the following: ' 1. Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete and Miscellaneous Cast -m -Place Concrete" for general building applications of concrete. 2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, grading, and subbase ' course. 3. Division 32 Section "Decorative Concrete Paving" for surface - imprinted, stamped fmished concrete pavement. 4. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants of joints in concrete pavement and at isolation joints of concrete pavement with adjacent construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS ' A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast - furnace slag. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. ' B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete pavement mixture. Include altemate mixture designs when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances ' warrant adjustments. C. Samples: 10 -1b (4.5 -kg) sample of exposed aggregate. 1 CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 1 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 D. ualification Data: For manufacturer and testing agency. Q g E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials: 1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali- aggregate reactivity. F. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials complies with requirements: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Applied fmish materials. 7. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive. 8. Joint fillers. G. Field quality- control test reports. H. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready -mixed concrete products who complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete 1 Production Facilities." B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP -01 or an equivalent certification program. C. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. D. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. E. Mockups: Cast mockups of full -size sections of concrete pavement to demonstrate typical joints, surface fmish, texture, color, and standard of workmanship. 1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 1 CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 2 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be t constructed. 3. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting construction. 4. Maintain approved mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed pavement. ' 5. Demolish and remove approved mockups from the site when directed by Architect. 6. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1 F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete pavement mixture design and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials and concrete pavement construction practices. Require representatives, including the following, of each entity 1 directly concerned with concrete pavement, to attend conference: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready -mix concrete producer. d. Concrete pavement subcontractor. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. ' 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 1 1 CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 3 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2.2 FORMS 1 A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal -framed plywood, or other approved panel -type materials to provide full- depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. 1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves with a radius 100 feet (30.5 m) or less. 1 B. Form- Release Agent: Commercially formulated form- release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 1 B. Deformed -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet. C. Epoxy- Coated Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A, plain steel. 1 D. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420); deformed. E. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class II zinc coated, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and bending; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) deformed bars. 1 F. Epoxy- Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M or ASTM A 934/A 934M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) deformed bars. G. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed bars; assembled with clips. H. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. I. Deformed -Steel Wire: ASTM A 496. J. Epoxy- Coated -Steel Wire: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A coated, plain or deformed. K. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. L. Epoxy- Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain steel bars. M. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. N. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6), internally and externally threaded. Design hook -bolt joint assembly to hold coupling against pavement form and in position during concreting operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt. 1 CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 4 1 MGA #053570 08/06 I O. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete I of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: I 1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. 2. For epoxy- coated reinforcement, use epoxy- coated or other dielectric- polymer- coated I wire bar supports. P. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid two -part epoxy repair coating, compatible with epoxy coating on I reinforcement. Q. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780. I 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS I A. Cementitious Material: Use one of the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source throughout the Project: 1 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, II, I/II, III, V, gray, white. Supplement with the following: a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F. 1 b. Ground Granulated Blast- Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. 2. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595, Type IS, portland blast - furnace slag or IP, i portland - pozzolan or I (PM), pozzolan- modified Portland or I (SM), slag- modified portland cement. I B. Normal- Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S, 4M, 1N coarse aggregate, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar pavement applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. 1. Maximum Coarse - Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. I C. Exposed Aggregate: Selected, hard, and durable; washed; free of materials with deleterious reactivity to cement or that cause staining; from a single source, with gap - graded coarse I aggregate as follows: 1. Aggregate Sizes: 3/4 to 1 inch (19 to 25 mm nominal. 2. Aggregate Source, Shape, and Color: As indicated on plans. I D. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M. E. Air - Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 1 CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 5 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 e certified by manufacturer to be compatible with com F. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures y p other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water - soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material. 1. Water - Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water- Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High -Range, Water - Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High -Range, Water - Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 3 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017 /C 1017M, Type II. 2.5 FIBER REINFORCEMENT A. Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament or fibrillated polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1/2 to 1 -1/2 inches (13 to �. 38 mm) long. 1. Available Products: a. Monofilament Fibers: 1) Axim Concrete Technologies; Fibrasol IIP. 2) Euclid Chemical Company (The); Fiberstrand 100. 3) FORTA Corporation; Forta Mono. 4) Grace, W. R. & Co.-- Conn.; Grace MicroFiber. 5) Metalcrete Industries; Polystrand 1000. 6) SI Concrete Systems; Fibermix Stealth. b. Fibrillated Fibers: 1) Axim Concrete Technologies; Fibrasol F. 2) FORTA Corporation; Forta. 3) Euclid Chemical Company (The); Fiberstrand F. 4) Grace, W. R. & Co.-- Conn.; Grace Fibers. 5) SI Concrete Systems; Fibermesh. 2.6 CURING MATERIALS A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. /sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) dry. B. Moisture - Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap - polyethylene sheet. C. Water: Potable. D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete. 1 CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 6 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1. Available Products: 1 a. Axim Concrete Technologies; Cimfilm. b. Burke by Edeco; BurkeFilm. c. ChemMasters; Spray -Film. 1 d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Aquafilm. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film. f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Eucobar. g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor Aid. h. Lambert Corporation; Lambco Skin. i. L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E -Con. 1 j. MBT Protection and Repair, ChemRex Inc.; Confilm. k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Evapre. 1. Metalcrete Industries Waterhold. m. Nox -Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Monofilm. n. Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaFilm. o. Symons Corporation; Finishing Aid. p. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi -Vex EnvioAssist. E. Clear Waterborne Membrane - Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class 13. 1. Available Products: a. Anti -Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB. b. Burke by Edoko; Aqua Resin Cure. c. ChemMasters; Safe -Cure Clear. d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.; W.B. Resin Cure. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day Chem Rez Cure (J- 11 -W). f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Kurez DR VOX. g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420. h. Lambert Corporation; Aqua Kure - Clear. i. L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L &M Cure R. j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100 Clear. k. Nox -Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Resin Cure E. 1. Symons Corporation; Resi -Chem Clear. m. Tamms Industries Inc.; Homcure WB 30. n. Unitex; Hydro Cure 309. o. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi -Vex Enviocure 100. F. White Waterborne Membrane - Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class B. 1. Available Products: a. Anti -Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 WP WB. b. Burke by Edoco; Resin Emulsion White. c. ChemMasters; Safe -Cure 2000. d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc. W.B. Resin Cure. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day -Chem White Pigmented Cure (J- 10 -W). f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Kurez VOX WhiteTigmented. g. Kaufinan Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 450. h. Lambert Corporation; Aqua Kure - White. CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 7 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 i. L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L &M Cure R -2. j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1200 - White. k. Symons Corporation; Resi -Chem White. 1. Tamms Industries, Inc.; Homcure 200 -W. m. Unitex; Hydro White. n. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi -Vex Enviocure White 100. 1 2.7 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation - Joint- Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt - saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self - expanding cork. B. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral -oxide pigments or colored water - reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Bayer Corporation. b. ChemMasters. c. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Davis Colors. e. Elementis Pigments, Inc. f. Hoover Color Corporation. g. Lambert Corporation. h. Scofield, L. M.Company. i. Solomon Colors. 2. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designation, match Architect's sample, or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Slip- Resistive Aggregate Finish: Factory- graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive aggregate of fused aluminum -oxide granules or crushed emery with emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 20 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials. D. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non - redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. E. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two- component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing 1 and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to requirements, and as follows: 1. Types I and II, non -load bearing or IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. F. Chemical Surface Retarder: Water - soluble, liquid -set retarder with color dye, for horizontal concrete surface application, capable of temporarily delaying final hardening of concrete to a depth of 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm). 1. Available Products: 1 CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 8 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 a. Burke by Edeco; True Etch Surface Retarder. b. ChemMasters; Exposee. c. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Delay S. d. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Surface Retarder S. e. Kaufinan Products, Inc.; Expose. f. Metalcrete Industries; Surftard. g. Nox -Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Crete -Nox TA. h. Scofield, L. M. Company; Lithotex. i. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Rugasol -S. j. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi -Vex Envioset. G. Pigmented Mineral Dry-Shake Hardener: Factory- packaged dry combination of portland cement, graded quartz aggregate, color pigments, and plasticizing admixture. Use color pigments that are finely ground, nonfading mineral oxides interground with cement. 1. Available Products: a. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Conshake 600 Colortone. b. Dayton Superior Corporation; Quartz Tuff. c. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Surflex. d. Lambert Corporation; Colorhard. e. L &M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Quartz Plate FF. f. MBT Protection and Repair, ChemRex Inc.; Mastercron. g. Metalcrete Industries; Floor Quartz. h. Scofield, L. M. Company; Lithochrome Color Hardener. i. Symons Corporation; Hard Top. 2. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designation, match Architect's sample or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. H. Rock Salt: Sodium chloride crystals, kiln dried, coarse gradation with 100 percent passing 3/8- inch (9.5 -mm) sieve and 85 percent retained on a No. 8 (2.36 -min) sieve. 2.8 PAVEMENT MARKINGS A. Pavement- Marking Paint: Alkyd -resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with FS TT -P -115, Type I or II or AASHTO M 248, Type N or F. 1. Color: As indicated. B. Pavement - Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with FS TT -P -1952, with drying time of less than [3] [45] minutes. 1. Color: As indicated. C. Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type 1. 1 1 CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 9 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2.9 WHEEL STOPS A. Wheel Stops: Precast, air - entrained concrete, 2500 -psi (17.2 -MPa) minimum compressive 1 strength, 4 -1/2 inches (115 mm) high by 9 inches (225 mm) wide by 72 inches (1820 mm) long. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside and holes for anchoring to substrate. 1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) diameter, 10 -inch (254 -mm) minimum length. B. Wheel Stops: Solid, integrally colored, 96 percent recycled HDPE or commingled 1 postconsumer and postindustrial recycled plastic; UV stabilized; 4 inches (100 mm) high by 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 72 inches (1820 mm) long. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside and holes for anchoring to substrate. 1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) diameter, 10 -inch (254 -mm) minimum length. J 2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal- weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete mixture designs for the trial batch method. B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal- weight concrete with the following properties: 1 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi (20.7 MPa). 2. Maximum Water - Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.50 or per plan. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) or per plan, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). C. Add air - entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal- weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows: 1. Air Content: 2 -1/2 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 1 -1/2 -inch (38 -mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. 2. Air Content: 3 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 1 -inch (25 -mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. 3. Air Content: 3 -1/2 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) nominal maximum aggregate size D. Limit water - soluble, chloride -ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of 1 cement. E. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. �. 1. Use water - reducing admixture or high -range, water - reducing admixture or high -range, water- reducing and retarding admixture or plasticizing and retarding admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 10 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 ix when required by high temperatures, 2. Use water - reducing and retarding admixture q y gh p , low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. F. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements for concrete exposed to deicing chemicals as follows: 1. Fly Ash or Pozzolan: 25 percent. 2. Ground Granulated Blast- Furnace Slag: 50 percent. 3. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan, and Ground Granulated Blast- Furnace Slag: 50 percent, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent. G. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.O lb /cu. yd. (0.60 kg/cu. m) or per plans. H. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup. 2.11 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work. 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1 -1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. B. Project -Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum -type batch machine mixer. 1. For concrete mixes of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least 1 -1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. 2. For concrete mixes larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m). 3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project 1 identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixing time, quantity, and amount of water added. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances. B. Proof -roll prepared subbase surface below concrete pavements with heavy pneumatic -tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. r CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 11 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction. P Y P P P rP Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h). 2. Proof -roll with a loaded 10 -wheel tandem -axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons (13.6 tonnes). 3. Subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch (13 mm) require correction according to requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." C. Proceed with concrete pavement operations only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. 3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form- release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage. 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond - reducing materials. 1 C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. 11 D. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. E. Zinc- Coated Reinforcement: Use galvanized steel wire ties to fasten zinc- coated reinforcement. Repair cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc repair material. F. Epoxy- Coated Reinforcement: Use epoxy- coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy- coated reinforcement. Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. G. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2 -inch (50 -mm) overlap of adjacent mats. 1 CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 12 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 3.5 JOINTS A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. 1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated. 1 B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one -half hour unless pavement terminates at isolation joints. 1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated. 3. Butt Joints: Use bonding agent or epoxy bonding adhesive at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 4. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway- section forms or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. 5. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt -coat one -half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint - filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated. 1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet (15.25 m), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. 4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. 5. Furnish joint fillers in one -piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint- filler sections together. 6. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one - fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete pavement per plan: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4 -inch (6 -mm) or per plan radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond - rimmed blades. Cut 1/8 -inch- (3 -mm -) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks. CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 13 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 on Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints Doweled Contraction pp oints where � indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one -half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 1 E. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to a 1/4 -inch (6 -nun) radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT 1 A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces. C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment. D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. 1 E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. F. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing. J G. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. �I H. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. 1 1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square -faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices. I. Place concrete in two operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to the required depth below finish surface. Lay welded wire fabric or fabricated bar mats immediately in fmal position. Place top layer of concrete, strike off, and screed. 1. Remove and replace concrete that has been placed for more than 15 minutes without P being covered by top layer, or use bonding agent if approved by Architect. J. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. 1 K. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments. CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 14 1 MGA #053570 08/06 L. Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement, • submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not approved, remove and replace with formed concrete. M. Slip -Form Pavers: When automatic machine placement is used for pavement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce pavement to required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as required for formed pavement. 1. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of paver machine during operations. N. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28 -day compressive strength. O. Cold- Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. P. Hot - Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot - weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water - soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.7 FLOAT FINISHING not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations. General: Do a g S erations. P B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed -water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power - driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1 CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 15 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float - finished concrete, 1 perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture. 2. Medium -to- Fine - Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float - finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine -line texture. 3. Medium -to- Coarse- Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating float - finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch (1.6 to 3 mm) deep with a stiff- bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic. 3.8 SPECIAL FINISHES 1 A. Monolithic Exposed - Aggregate Finish: Expose coarse aggregate in pavement surfaces as follows: 1. Immediately after float finishing, spray -apply chemical surface retarder to pavement according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Cover pavement surface with plastic sheeting, sealing laps with tape, and remove when ready to continue fmishing operations. 3. Without dislodging aggregate, remove excess mortar by lightly brushing surface with a stiff, nylon- bristle broom. 4. Fine -spray surface with water and brush. Repeat water flushing and brushing cycle until cement film is removed from aggregate surfaces to depth required. B. Seeded Exposed - Aggregate Finish: Immediately after initial floating, spread a single layer of aggregate uniformly on pavement surface. Tamp aggregate into plastic concrete, and float finish to entirely embed aggregate with mortar cover of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 1. Spray -apply chemical surface retarder to pavement according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Cover pavement surface with plastic sheeting, sealing laps with tape, and remove sheeting when ready to continue finishing operations. 3. Without dislodging aggregate, remove excess mortar by lightly brushing surface with a stiff, nylon - bristle broom. 4. Fine -spray surface with water and brush. Repeat water flushing and brushing cycle until cement film is removed from aggregate surfaces to depth required. C. Slip Resistive Aggregate Finish: Before final floating, spread slip- resistive aggregate fmish on pavement surface according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Uniformly spread 25 lb /100 sq. ft. (12 kg/10 sq. m) dampened slip- resistive aggregate over pavement surface in 2 applications. Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel, but do not force below surface. 2. Uniformly distribute approximately two -thirds of slip- resistive aggregate over pavement surface with mechanical spreader, allow to absorb moisture, and embed by power floating. Follow power floating with a second slip- resistive aggregate application, uniformly distributing remainder of material at right angles to first application to ensure uniform coverage, and embed by power floating. 3. Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by slip- resistive aggregate manufacturer. Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing. 4. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or abrasive stone and water to expose nonslip aggregate. CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 16 1 .1 MGA #053570 08/06 floating, spread 5 lb /100 s . ft. (0.2 k 10 s . m D. Rock -Salt Finish: After initial g, y p q ( g/ q m) rock salt over pavement surface. 1. Cover pavement surface with 1 -mil- (0.025 -mm -) thick polyethylene sheet and remove sheet when concrete has hardened and 7 -day curing period has elapsed. 2. Embed rock salt into plastic concrete, power float concrete, and trowel fmish. 3. After 7 -day curing period, saturate concrete with water and broom -sweep surface to dissolve remaining rock salt. E. Pigmented Mineral Dry-Shake Hardener Finish: After initial floating, apply dry-shake materials to pavement surface according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Uniformly spread dry-shake hardener at a rate of 100 lb /100 sq. ft. (49 kg/10 sq. m), unless greater amount is recommended by manufacturer to match pavement color required. 2. Uniformly distribute approximately two -thirds of dry-shake hardener over pavement surface with mechanical spreader, allow to absorb moisture, and embed by power floating. Follow power floating with a second dry-shake hardener application, uniformly distributing remainder of material at right angles to first application to ensure uniform color, and embed by power floating. 3. After final floating, apply a hand - trowel finish followed by a broom finish to concrete. 4. Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by dry-shake hardener manufacturer. Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing. 3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot 1 temperatures. B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold - weather protection. C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb /sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, 1 screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture - retaining -cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows: 1. Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water -fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12 -inch (300 -mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 1 CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 17 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2. Moisture - Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture - retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.10 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows: 1 1. Elevation: 1/4 inch (6 mrn). 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch (10 mm), minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3. Surface: Gap below 10 -foot- (3 -m -) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch ( 4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch (25 mm). 5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 6. Alignment of Tie -Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 inch (13 mm). 7. Alignment of Dowel -Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length of dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches (6 mm per 300 mm). 8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches (75 mm). 9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus. 10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), no minus. 3.11 PAVEMENT MARKING A. Do not apply pavement - marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect. 1 B. Allow concrete pavement to cure for 28 days and be dry before starting pavement marking. C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings of dimensions indicated with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils (0.4 mm). 1. Spread glass beads uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 lb /gal. (0.72 1 kg/L). 3.12 WHEEL STOPS A. Securely attach wheel stops into pavement with not less than two galvanized steel dowels embedded in holes drilled or cast into wheel stops at one - quarter to one -third points. Firmly CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 18 i 1 MGA #053570 08/06 II and to pavement. Securely install dowels into bond each dowel to wheel stop p y pavement and p III bond to wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1 A. Testing Agency: Contractor to engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. J B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least 1 composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m) or 5000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m)} or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. I a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive - strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. I , 2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. I 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F 1 (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31 /C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive - Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test 1 specimen at 7 days and 2 specimens at 28 days. a. A compressive - strength test shall be the average compressive strength from 2 specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days. C. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if average of any 3 consecutive compressive - strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive - strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa). D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive - strength tests shall contain Project I identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch m Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28 -day tests. E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. I 1 CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 19 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements JR have not been met, as directed by Architect. If G. Remove and replace concrete pavement where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.14 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not 1 comply with requirements in this Section. B. Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive. C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. I D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial : Completion inspections. END OF SECTION 321313 II 1 i 1 1 ,. i 1 CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 20 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 SECTION 321400 - UNIT PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY 1 A. This Section includes the following: 1. Brick pavers set in aggregate, bituminous, and mortar setting beds. 2. Concrete pavers set in aggregate, bituminous, and mortar setting beds. 3. Asphalt -block pavers set in bituminous setting beds. 4. Rough -stone pavers set in aggregate and mortar setting beds. 5. Plastic, Steel, Aluminum edge restraints. 6. Cast -in -place concrete edge restraints. 7. Precast concrete curbs. 8. Stone curbs. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 07 Section "Self- Adhering Sheet Waterproofing and Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing and Thermoplastic Sheet Waterproofmg]" for waterproofmg and protection board under plaza deck pavers. 2. Division 07 Section "Hot Fluid- Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofmg and Cold Fluid- Applied Waterproofing" for waterproofing and protection board under plaza deck pavers. 3. Division 07 Section "Built-up Asphalt Roofing, Built -up Coal -Tar Roofing, Atactic- Polypropylene (APP) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing] [Styrene- Butadiene- Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing, Self- Adhering Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing, Ethylene- Propylene - Diene- Monomer (EPDM) Membrane Roofing] [Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing]" for roof pavers. 4. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit pavers with elastomeric sealants. 5. Division 09 Section "Brick Flooring" for brick flooring for interior applications. 6. Division 09 Section "Stone Flooring" for dimension stone paving. 7. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation and compacted subgrade. 8. Division 32 Section "Asphalt Paving" for asphalt base under unit pavers. 9. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for concrete base under unit pavers and for cast - m -place concrete curbs and gutters serving as edge restraint for unit pavers. UNIT PAVING 321400 - 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For materials other than water and aggregates. 1 B. Product Data: For the following: 1. Pavers. 1 2. Bituminous setting materials. 3. Mortar and grout materials. 4. Edge restraints. 5. Precast concrete curbs. 6. Stone curbs. C. Sieve Analyses: For aggregate setting -bed materials, according to ASTM C 136. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following: 1. Each type of unit paver indicated. 2. Joint materials involving color selection. 3. Exposed edge restraints involving color selection. 4. Precast concrete curbs. 5. Granite for stone curbs. E. Samples for Verification: 1. Full -size units of each type of unit paver indicated. Assemble not less than five Samples of each type of unit on suitable backing and grout joints. 2. Joint materials. 3. Exposed edge restraints. 4. Precast concrete curbs. 5. Stone curbs. F. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From latex- additive manufacturer for mortar and grout containing latex additives. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material, and setting material from one source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. B. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to latex- additive manufacturer, for testing indicated below, samples of paving materials that will contact or affect mortar and grout that contain latex additives. 1. Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether mortar and grout materials will obtain optimum adhesion with, and will be nonstaining to, installed pavers and other materials constituting paver installation. UNIT PAVING 321400 - 2 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." DELIVERY, STORAGE, , AND HANDLING 1 A. Store pavers on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. 1 B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Store liquids in tightly closed containers protected from freezing. E. Store asphalt cement and other bituminous materials in tightly closed containers. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold- Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver work damaged by frost or freezing. B. Weather Limitations for Bituminous Setting Bed: 1. Install bituminous setting bed only when ambient temperature is above 40 deg F (4 deg C) and when base is dry. 2. Apply asphalt adhesive only when ambient temperature is above 50 deg F (10 deg C) and when temperature has not been below 35 deg F (2 deg C) for 12 hours immediately 1 before application. Do not apply when setting bed is wet or contains excess moisture. C. Weather Limitations for Mortar and Grout: 1 1. Cold- Weather Requirements: Protect unit paver work against freezing when ambient temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and falling. Heat materials to provide mortar and grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Provide the following protection for completed portions of work for 24 hours after installation when the mean daily air temperature is as indicated: below 40 deg F (4 deg C), cover with weather - resistant membrane; below 25 deg F (minus 4 deg C), cover with insulating blankets; below 20 deg F (minus 7 deg C), provide enclosure and temporary heat to maintain temperature above 32 deg F (0 deg C). 2. Hot - Weather Requirements: Protect unit paver work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of setting beds and grout. Provide artificial UNIT PAVING 321400 - 3 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 shade and windbreaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F (38 deg C) and higher. a. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F (38 deg C), or when wind velocity exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h) and ambient temperature exceeds 90 deg F (32 deg C), set pavers within 1 minute of spreading setting -bed mortar. 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BRICK PAVERS A. Brick Pavers: Light -traffic paving brick; ASTM C 902, Class SX, MX, Type I, II, III, 1 Application PS, PX, PA. Provide brick without frogs or cores in surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work. 1. Basis -of- Design Product: The design for brick pavers is based on drawings. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Per plans and architectural approval. 2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Per plan and architectural approval. 4. Thickness: As indicated. 5. Face Size: As indicated. 6. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Brick Pavers: Heavy vehicular paving brick; ASTM C 1272, Type F, Application PX; Type R, Application PS; Type R, Application PX; Type R, Application PA. Provide brick without frogs or cores in surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work. 1. Basis -of- Design Product: The design for brick pavers is based on plans or per architectural approval. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Per plans and per architectural approval. 2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be 1 incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Per plan and architectural approval. 4. Thickness: As indicated. 5. Face Size: As indicated. 6. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. UNIT PAVING 321400 - 4 i 1 MGA #053570 08/06 shall rated "not effloresced" when tested according Efflorescence: Brick sha be g to ASTM C 67. D. Temporary Protective Coating: Precoat exposed surfaces of brick pavers with a continuous film of a temporary protective coating that is compatible with brick, mortar, and grout products and can be removed without damaging grout or brick. Do not coat unexposed brick surfaces. 2.2 CONCRETE PAVERS A. Concrete Pavers: Solid interlocking paving units complying with ASTM C 936 and resistant to freezing and thawing when tested according to ASTM C 67, made from normal- weight I aggregates. 1. Basis - of- Design Product: The design for concrete pavers is based on architectural approval and per plans. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Per plans and architectural approval. 2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Per plans and architectural approval. 1 4. Thickness: 2 -3/8 inches (60 mm) or per plan. 5. Face Size and Shape: As indicted on plans and per architectural approval. 6. Face Size and Shape: As indicted on plans and per architectural approval rectangle. 7. Face Size and Shape: As indicated. 8. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Concrete Pavers: Solid paving units, made from normal-weight concrete with a compressive strength not less than 5000 psi (34 MPa), water absorption not more than 5 percent according to ASTM C 140, and no breakage and not more than 1 percent mass loss when tested for freeze - thaw resistance according to ASTM C 67. 1. Basis -of- Design Product: The design for concrete pavers is based on plans and architectural approval. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named 1 product or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Per plans and architectural approval. 1 2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Per plan and architectural approval. 4. Thickness: Per plans and as approved by architectural direction. 5. Face Size and Shape: per plans and approved by architect. 6. Face Size and Shape: Per plan and per the approval of architect rectangle. 1 UNIT PAVING 321400 - 5 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 7. Face Size and Shape: As indicated. 8. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 1 2.3 ASPHALT -BLOCK PAVERS A. Asphalt -Block Pavers: Solid units made from asphalt cement complying with ASTM D 312, Type III; inorganic stone dust or cement filler; and coarse aggregate, consisting of clean, hard, unweathered stone crushed into angular particles varying in size up to 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). IP 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hanover Architectural Products, Inc. 1 b. Per plans and architectural approval. 3. Thickness: As indicted on plans and per architectural approval j 4. Face Size: As indicted on plans and per architectural approval. 5. Dimensional Tolerances: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 1 6. Finish: Natural, smooth; Ground; Ground and sandblasted. 7. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 1 2.4 ROUGH -STONE PAVERS A. Rough -Stone Pavers: Rectangular paving stones, with split faces and edges, made from granite 1 complying with ASTM C 615. 1. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1 a. Per plans and architectural approval. 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 3. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Buechel Stone Corp. b. Cold Spring Granite Inc. c. Fletcher Granite Company, Inc. d. Granicor, Inc. e. Milestone Imports, Inc. f. New England Stone, LLC. g. North Carolina Granite Corporation. 4. Granite Color and Grain: Per plan and architectural approval. UNIT PAVING 321400 - 6 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 of first four options in subparagraph below for pavers made by splitting 5. Select one o p P Y P g thermal - finished slabs into blocks. Usually select fifth option for pavers with rough -split faces. 6. Thickness: Per plans and architectural approval. 7. Face Size: As indicted. 1 2.5 ACCESSORIES 1 A. Plastic Edge Restraints: Triangular PVC extrusions 1 -3/4 inches (45 mm) high by 3 -1/2 inches (89 mm) wide, 3 -1/8 inches (79 mm) high by 9 -1/2 inches (241 mm) wide designed to serve as edge restraints for unit pavers; rigid type for straight edges and flexible type for curved edges, with pipe connectors and 3/8 -inch (9.5 -mm) diameter by 12 -inch- (300 -mm -) long steel spikes. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 1 following: a. BRICKSTOP Corporation. b. Dimex Corporation. c. PAVE TECH Inc. d. Ryerson, J. T. & Son, Inc. B. Steel Edge Restraints: Painted steel edging 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) thick by 4 inches (100 mm) high, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick by 5 inches (125 mm) high with loops pressed from or welded to face to receive stakes at 36 inches (900 mm) o.c., and steel stakes 15 inches (380 mm) long for 1 each loop. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Border Concepts, Inc. b. Collier Metal Specialties, Inc. 1 c. J. D. Russell Company (The). d. Ryerson, J. T. & Son, Inc. e. Sure -Loc Edging Corporation. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Aluminum Edge Restraints: Per plan and architectural approval for the high extruded - aluminum edging with loops pressed from face to receive stakes at 12 inches (300 mm) o.c., and aluminum stakes 12 inches (300 mm) long for each loop. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 UNIT PAVING 321400 - 7 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 r: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products b 2. Manufacturer: SubJec o co p ance q , p p by one of the following: a. BRICKSTOP Corporation. b. Curv-Rite, Inc. c. Permaloc Corporation. d. Sure -Loc Edging Corporation. D. Job -Built Concrete Edge Restraints: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast - in -Place Concrete" for normal- weight, air- entrained, ready -mixed concrete with minimum 28- day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa). E. Precast Concrete Curbs: Made from normal - weight concrete with a compressive strength not less than 5000 psi (34 MPa) and water absorption not more than 5 percent, in shapes and sizes indicated. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hanover Architectural Products, Inc. 1 b. Per plan and architectural approval. 3. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. F. Stone Curbs: Granite curbing, with face battered 1 inch per foot (1:12), produced in random lengths not less than 36 inches (900 mm) from granite complying with ASTM C 615. 1. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Per plan and architectural approval. 1 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 3. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Cold Spring Granite Inc. b. Fletcher Granite Company, Inc. c. Granicor, Inc. d. New England Stone, LLC. e. North Carolina Granite Corporation. f. Polycor Inc. g. Swenson Granite Co. 4. Granite Color and Grain: Per plan and architectural approval. 5. Top Width: Per plan and architectural approval. 6. Face Height: Per plan and architectural. 1 UNIT PAVING 321400 - 8 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 7. Total Height: Per plan and architectural approval. 1 8. Top Finish: Per plan and architectural approval. 9. Face Finish: Per plan and architectural approval. G. Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752, Type II. H. Compressible Foam Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1. 2.6 AGGREGATE SETTING -BED MATERIALS A. Graded Aggregate for Subbase: Sound, crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 57; ASTM D 2940, subbase material; requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for subbase material]. R B. Graded Aggregate for Base: Sound, crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8; ASTM D 2940, base material; requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for base course. C. Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with gradation requirements in ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate. D. Stone Screenings for Leveling Course: Sound stone screenings complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 10. E. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing No. 16 (1.18 -mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 (0.075 -mm) sieve. 1. Provide sand of color needed to produce required joint color. F. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications; 1 made from polyolefms or polyesters, with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced: 1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. 2. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 (0.250 -mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 3. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. 4. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355. 1 G. Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle - punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefms or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced: 1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. 2. Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 (0.425 -mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 3. Permittivity: 0.5 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. 4. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355. 1 H. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered with the EPA. Provide in granular, liquid, or wettable powder form. r UNIT PAVING 321400 - 9 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2.7 BITUMINOUS SETTING -BED MATERIALS A. Primer for Base: ASTM D 2028, cutback asphalt, grade as recommended by unit paver 1 manufacturer. B. Fine Aggregate for Setting Bed: ASTM D 1073, No. 2 or No. 3. C. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381, Viscosity Grade AC -10 or Grade AC -20. D. Neoprene- Modified Asphalt Adhesive: Paving manufacturer's standard adhesive consisting of 1 oxidized asphalt combined with 2 percent neoprene and 10 percent long - fibered mineral fibers containing no asbestos. E. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing No. 16 (1.18 -mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 (0.075 -mm) sieve. 1. Provide sand of color needed to produce required joint color. r 2.8 MORTAR SETTING -BED MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Sand: ASTM C 144. D. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard; acrylic - resin; or styrene - butadiene - rubber water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex- additive manufacturer for use with field -mixed portland cement mortar bed, and not containing a retarder. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering latex additives that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide latex additive by one of the following: a. Boiardi Products Corporation. li - b. Bonsai, W. R. Company. c. Bostik Findley Inc. d. C -Cure. e. Custom Building Products. 1 f. DAP Inc. g. Jamo Inc. h. Laticrete International, Inc. i. MAPEI Corp. j. SGM. k. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 1. TEC Incorporated; H. B. Fuller Company. 1 UNIT PAVING 321400 - 10 11 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 E. Water: Potable. F. Reinforcing Wire: Galvanized, welded, 0.062 -inch- (1.57 -mm -) diameter wire; 2 -by -2 -inch (51- by- 51 -mm) mesh; comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for minimum wire size. 1 2.9 GROUT MATERIALS A. Sand - Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement, unfading mineral pigments and white or colored sand as required to produce required color. 1. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard; acrylic - resin; or styrene - butadiene - rubber water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex- additive manufacturer for use with field -mixed sand- ' portland cement grout. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering latex additives that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: b. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide latex additive by one of the following: 1) Boiardi Products Corporation. 2) Bonsal, W. R. Company. 1 3) Bostik Findley Inc. 4) C -Cure. 5) Custom Building Products. 6) DAP Inc. 7) Jamo Inc. 8) Laticrete International, Inc. 9) MAPEI Corp. 10) SGM. 11) Summitville Tiles, Inc. 12) TEC Incorporated; H. B. Fuller Company. B. Polymer- Modified Grout: ANSI A118.7, sanded grout; in color indicated. 1 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering polymer- modified grouts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide polymer- modified grout by one of the following: a. Boiardi Products Corporation. b. Bonsal, W. R. Company. c. Bostik Findley Inc. d. C -Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. DAP Inc. g. Jamo Inc. 1 UNIT PAVING 321400 - 11 1 MGA #053570 08/06 h. Laticrete International Inc. i. MAPEI Corp. j. SGM. 1 k. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 1. TEC Incorporated; H. B. Fuller Company. 3. Product Type: Dry mix, containing ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients. 4. Product Type: Two - component mix, containing acrylic resin; or styrene - butadiene rubber in liquid -latex form and prepackaged dry-grout mix complying with ANSI A118.6 and recommended by latex- additive manufacturer. 5. Product Type: Either dry mix, containing ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients, or two- component mix, containing acrylic resin or styrene - butadiene rubber in liquid -latex form and prepackaged dry-grout mix complying with ANSI A118.6 and recommended by latex- additive manufacturer. C. Grout Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. D. Water: Potable. 1 2.10 BITUMINOUS SETTING -BED MIX A. Mix bituminous setting bed materials at an asphalt plant in approximate proportion, by weight, of 7 percent asphalt cement to 93 percent fine aggregate, unless otherwise indicated. Heat mixture to 300 deg F (149 deg C). 1 2.11 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions for mix proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing times, and other procedures needed to produce setting -bed and joint materials of uniform quality and with optimum performance characteristics. Discard mortars and grout if they have reached their initial set before being used. B. Mortar -Bed Bond Coat: Mix neat cement or cement and sand with latex additive; water to a creamy consistency. C. Portland Cement -Lime Setting -Bed Mortar: Type M complying with ASTM C 270, Proportion 1 Specification. D. Latex - Modified, Portland Cement Setting -Bed Mortar: Proportion and mix portland cement, 1 sand, and latex additive for setting bed to comply with written instructions of latex- additive manufacturer and as necessary to produce stiff mixture with a moist surface when bed is ready to receive pavers. 1 E. Latex - Modified, Portland Cement Slurry Bond Coat: Proportion and mix portland cement, sand, and latex additive for slurry bond coat to comply with written instructions of latex - additive manufacturer. 1 UNIT PAVING 321400 - 12 1 MGA #053570 08/06 - mix job-mixed portland cement and sand to 1 F. Job Mixed Portland Cement Grout: Proportion and m � p match setting -bed mortar, except omit hydrated lime and use enough water to produce a pourable mixture. G. Job - Mixed, Polymer- Modified Portland Cement Grout: Add liquid -latex additive to portland cement and sand in proportion and concentration recommended by liquid -latex manufacturer. Proportion cement and sand to comply with written instructions of latex- additive manufacturer. 1. Pigmented Grout: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not exceed pigment -to- cement ratio of 1:10, by weight. 2. Colored - Aggregate Grout: Produce color required by combining colored sand with portland cement of selected color. H. Packaged, Polymer- Modified Grout Mix: Proportion and mix grout ingredients according to grout manufacturer's written instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Where pavers are to be installed over waterproofing, examine waterproofing installation, with waterproofing Installer present, for protection from paving operations. Examine areas where waterproofing system is turned up or flashed against vertical surfaces and horizontal waterproofing. Proceed with installation only after protection is in place. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove substances from concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond, including curing 1 and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance. B. Clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles. C. Proof -roll prepared subgrade according to requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Proceed with unit paver installation only after deficient subgrades have been corrected and are ready to receive subbase and base course for unit pavers. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that might be visible in finished work. B. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors and textures. UNIT PAVING 321400 - 13 1 MGA #053570 08/06 masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, ed 1 C. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven my p arp, pp edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable. 1 1. For concrete pavers, a block splitter may be used. D. Exercise care in handling coated brick pavers to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs 1 or edges of other units. Remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting brick. E. Joint Pattern: As indicated. 1 F. Pavers over Waterproofing: Exercise care in placing pavers and setting materials over waterproofmg so protection materials are not displaced and waterproofing is not punctured or 1 otherwise damaged. Carefully replace protection materials that become displaced and arrange for repair of damaged waterproofing before covering with paving. 1. Provide joint filler at waterproofing that is turned up on vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated; where unfilled joints are indicated, provide temporary filler or protection until paver installation is complete. G. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/32 -inch (0.8 -mm) unit -to -unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving. H. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16 -inch (1.6 -mm) unit -to -unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 24 inches (3 min in 600 mm) and 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving. 1 Expansion and Control Joints: Provide for sealant- filled joints at locations and of widths indicated. Provide foam filler as backing for sealant- filled joints, unless otherwise indicated; where unfilled joints are indicated, provide temporary filler until paver installation is complete. Install joint filler before setting pavers. Sealant materials and installation are specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." J. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide joint filler at locations and of widths indicated. Install joint filler before setting pavers. Make top of joint filler flush with top of pavers. K. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers. 1. Install edge restraints to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install stakes at intervals required to hold edge restraints in place during and after unit paver installation. 2. For metal edge restraints with top edge exposed, drive stakes at least 1 inch (25 mm) below top edge. 3. Install job -built concrete edge restraints to comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." 4. Where pavers set in mortar bed are indicated as edge restraints for pavers set in aggregate setting bed, install pavers set in mortar and allow mortar to cure before placing aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers. Cut off mortar bed at a steep angle so it will not interfere with aggregate setting bed. 5. Where pavers embedded in concrete are indicated as edge restraints for pavers set in aggregate setting bed, install pavers embedded in concrete and allow concrete to cure 1 UNIT PAVING 321400 - 14 1 MGA #053570 08/06 in bed and remainder of pavers. Hold top placing aggregate setting be p p of concrete below aggregate setting bed. L. Provide steps made of pavers as indicated. Install paver steps before installing adjacent pavers. 1. Where pavers set in mortar bed are indicated for steps constructed adjacent to pavers set in aggregate setting bed, install steps and allow mortar to cure before placing aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers. Cut off mortar bed at a steep angle so it will not interfere with aggregate setting bed. 3.4 AGGREGATE SETTING -BED APPLICATIONS A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 1557 laboratory density. B. Proof -roll prepared subgrade to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed. it over prepared subgrade, overlapping ends and edges at least 12 ed C. Place separation geotextile o p p gra pp g g inches (300 mm). D. Place aggregate subbase and base, compact by tamping with plate vibrator, and screed to depth indicated. E. Place aggregate subbase and base, compact to 100 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum laboratory density, and screed to depth indicated. 1 F. Place drainage geotextile over compacted base course, overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches (300 mm). 1 G. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1 -1/2 inches (25 to 38 mm), taking care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted. 1 H. Treat leveling course with herbicide to inhibit growth of grass and weeds. I. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) and a maximum of 1/8 inch (3 mm), being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight against spacer bars. Use string lines to keep straight lines. Fill gaps between units that exceed 3/8 inch (10 mm) with pieces cut to fit from full -size unit pavers. 1. When installation is performed with mechanical equipment, use only unit pavers with spacer bars on sides of each unit. J. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low - amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to 5000 -lbf (16- to 22 -kN) compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Perform at least three passes across paving with vibrator. Vibrate under the following conditions: 1. After edge pavers are installed and there is a completed surface or before surface is exposed to rain. UNIT PAVING 321400 - 15 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 ending each day's work, fully compact installed concrete 2. Before e g y y pavers to within 36 p p inches (900 mm) of the laying face. Cover pavers that have not been compacted, and leveling course on which pavers have not been placed, with nonstaining plastic sheets to protect them from rain. K. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling. L. Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints. 1 M. Repeat joint - filling process 30 days later. 3.5 BITUMINOUS SETTING -BED APPLICATIONS A. Apply primer to concrete slab or binder course immediately before placing setting bed. 1 B. Prepare for setting -bed placement by locating 3/4 -inch- (19 -mm -) deep control bars approximately 11 feet (3.3 m) apart and parallel to one another, to serve as guides for striking board. Adjust bars to subgrades required for accurate setting of paving units to fmished grades indicated. C. Place bituminous setting bed where indicated, in panels, by spreading bituminous material between control bars. Spread mix at a minimum temperature of 250 deg F (121 deg C). Strike setting bed smooth, fine, even, and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick. Add fresh bituminous material to low, porous spots after each pass of striking board. After each panel is completed, advance first control bar to next position in readiness for striking adjacent panels. Carefully fill depressions that remain after removing depth- control bars. 1. Roll setting bed with power roller to a nominal depth of 3/4 inch (19 mm). Adjust thickness as necessary to allow accurate setting of unit pavers to finished grades 1 indicated. Complete rolling before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F (85 deg C). D. Apply neoprene- modified asphalt adhesive to cold setting bed by squeegeeing or troweling to a uniform thickness of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). Proceed with setting of paving units only after adhesive is tacky and surface is dry to touch. E. Place pavers carefully by hand in straight courses, maintaining accurate alignment and uniform top surface. Protect newly laid pavers with plywood panels on which workers can stand. Advance protective panels as work progresses, but maintain protection in areas subject to continued movement of materials and equipment to avoid creating depressions or disrupting alignment of pavers. If additional leveling of paving is required, and before treating joints, roll paving with power roller after sufficient heat has built up in the surface from several days of hot weather. F. Joint Treatment: Place unit pavers with hand -tight joints. Fill joints by sweeping sand over paved surface until joints are filled. Remove excess sand after joints are filled. 1 1 UNIT PAVING 321400 - 16 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 3.6 MORTAR SETTING -BED APPLICATIONS 1 A. Saturate concrete subbase with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove surface water about one hour before placing setting bed. B. Apply mortar -bed bond coat over surface of concrete subbase about 15 minutes before placing setting bed. Limit area of bond coat to avoid its drying out before placing setting bed. Do not exceed 1/16 -inch (1.6 -mm) thickness for bond coat. C. Apply mortar bed over bond coat immediately after applying bond coat. Spread and screed setting bed to uniform thickness at subgrade elevations required for accurate setting of pavers to finished grades indicated. D. Place reinforcing wire over concrete subbase, lapped at joints by at least one full mesh and supported so mesh becomes embedded in the middle of setting bed. Hold edges back from 1 vertical surfaces approximately 1/2 inch (13 mm). E. Place mortar bed with reinforcing wire fully embedded in middle of setting bed. Spread and screed setting bed to uniform thickness at subgrade elevations required for accurate setting of pavers to fmished grades indicated. F. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with pavers before initial set. Cut back, bevel edge, remove, and discard setting -bed material that has reached initial set before placing pavers. G. Wet brick pavers before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. 1 H. Place pavers before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately before placing pavers on setting bed, apply uniform 1/16 -inch- (1.5 -mm -) thick, slurry bond coat to bed or to back of each paver with a flat trowel. I. Tamp or beat pavers with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting bed and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each paver in a single 1 operation before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set or disturb pavers for purposes of realigning fmished surfaces or adjusting joints. J. Spaced Joint Widths: Provide 3/8 -inch (10 -mm) nominal joint width with variations not exceeding plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). K. Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed. 1. Force grout into joints, taking care not to smear grout on adjoining surfaces. 2. Clean pavers as grouting progresses by dry brushing or rubbing with dry burlap to remove smears before tooling joints. 3. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 4. If tooling squeezes grout from joints, remove excess grout and smears by dry brushing or rubbing with dry burlap and tool joints again to produce a uniform appearance. UNIT PAVING 321400 - 17 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 L. Cure out by maintaining in a dam condition for seven days, unless otherwise recommended �' Y g P Y by grout or liquid -latex manufacturer. 1 3.7 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged 1 or that do not match adjoining units. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge voids or holes and completely fill with grout. Point up joints at sealant joints to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for sealant application. 1 C. Cleaning: Remove excess grout from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub clean. 1. Remove temporary protective coating from brick pavers as recommended by protective 1 coating manufacturer and as acceptable to unit paver and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains. END OF SECTION 321400 1 j 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 UNIT PAVING 321400 - 18 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 SECTION 329200 - TURF AND GRASSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Seeding. 2. Hydroseeding. 3. Sodding. 4. Plugging. 5. Sprigging. 6. Meadow grasses and wildflowers. 7. Turf renovation. 8. Erosion - control material(s). 1 9. Grass paving. B. Related Sections: 1 1. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for topsoil stripping and stockpiling., 2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation, filling and backfilling, and rough grading. 3. Division 32 Section "Porous Unit Paving" for concrete grid -type pavers shaped to provide open areas between units, planted with grass or other plants. 4. Division 32 Section "Planting Irrigation " for turf irrigation. 5. Division 32 Section "Plants" for border edgings. 6. Division 33 Section "Subdrainage" for subsurface drainage. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus. B. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. C. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off -site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil. D. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and 1 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. E. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses. 1 F. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in -place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed. 1 H. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms. 1 I. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's application 1 instructions specific to this Project. B. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass -seed monostand or mixture 1 stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging. 1 1. Certification of each seed mixture for turfgrass sod; plugs. Include identification of source and name and telephone number of supplier. 1 C. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer. D. Product Certificates: For soil amendments and fertilizers, from manufacturer. 1 E. Material Test Reports: For standardized ASTM D 5268 topsoil; existing native surface topsoil; existing in -place surface soil; and imported or manufactured topsoil. 1 F. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of turf and meadows during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required initial maintenance periods. 1 1 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 2 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful turf and meadows establishment. 1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association. 2. Experience: Five (5) years' experience in turf installation in addition to requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full -time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress. 4. Personnel Certifications: Installer's field supervisor shall have certification in all of the following categories from the Professional Landcare Network: a. Certified Landscape Technician - Exterior, with installation and maintenance and irrigation specialty area(s), designated CLT- Exterior. b. Certified Turfgrass Professional, designated CTP. c. Certified Turfgrass Professional of Cool Season Lawns, designated CTP -CSL. 5. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two (2) hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site. 6. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial. B. Soil- Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory or university laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to 1 conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be perfonmed. C. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil - testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant - nutrient content of the soil. 1 1. Testing methods and written recommendations shall comply with USDA's Handbook No. 60. 2. The soil - testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling, with depth, location, and number of samples to be taken per instructions from Architect. A minimum of three (3) representative samples shall be taken from varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for planting purposes. 1 3. Report suitability of tested soil for turf growth. a. Based on the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated. State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft. (92.9 sq. m) or volume per cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants. b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals, including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective 1 action. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site. 1 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 3 1 MGA #053570 08/06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, ELIVER , AND HANDLING A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened 1 containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable. . B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod in time for planting within 24 hours of harvesting. Protect sod from breakage and drying. C. Bulk Materials: 1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants. 2. Provide erosion - control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil - bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways. 3. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers, lime, and soil amendments with appropriate certificates. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1 A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with initial maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of planting completion; Substantial Completion. 1. Spring Planting: September 15. 2. Fall Planting: October 31. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape 1 Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established but for not less than the following periods: 1 1. Seeded Turf: 30 days from date of planting completion; Substantial Completion. a. When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if turf is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season. 2. Sodded Turf: 15 days from date of planting completion and Substantial Completion. 1 3. Plugged Turf: 15 days from date of planting completion and Substantial Completion. 1 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 4 1 MGA #053570 08/06 of planting completion and Substantial Completion. 4. Sprigged Turf: 15 days from date o pan g p p 1 B. Initial Meadow Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable meadow is established, but for not less than 30 days from date of planting completion and Substantial Completion. C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1 2.1 SEED A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new -crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances. B. Seed Species: State- certified seed of grass species as follows: C. Seed Species: Seed of grass species as follows, with not less than 95 percent germination, not less than 85 percent pure seed, and not more than 0.5 percent weed seed: 1. Full Sun: Bermudagrass (Cynodon dactylon). 2. Full Sun: Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis), a minimum of three cultivars. 3. Sun and Partial Shade: Proportioned by weight as follows: a. 50 percent Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis). b. 30 percent chewings red fescue (Festuca rubra variety) c. 10 percent perennial ryegrass (Lolium perenne). d. 10 percent redtop (Agrostis alba). ' 4. Shade: Proportioned by weight as follows: a. 50 percent chewings red fescue (Festuca rubra variety). 1 b. 35 percent rough bluegrass (Poa trivialis). c. 15 percent redtop (Agrostis alba). D. Grass Seed Mix: Proprietary seed mix as follows: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Per plans and architectural approval. 1 1 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 5 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2.2 TURFGRASS SOD A. Turfgrass Sod: Certified and Approved including Number 1 Quality/Premium, including 1 limitations on thatch, weeds, diseases, nematodes, and insects, complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted. B. Turfgrass Species: Bermudagrass (Cynodon dactylon); Carpetgrass ( Axonopus affmis); Centipedegrass (Eremochloa ophiuroides); St. Augustinegrass (Stenotaphrum secundatum); Zoysiagrass (Zoysia japonica); Zoysiagrass (Zoysia matrella). C. Turfgrass Species: Sod of grass species as follows, with not less than 95 percent germination, 1 not less than 85 percent pure seed, and not more than 0.5 percent weed seed: 1. Full Sun: Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis), a minimum of three cultivars. 2. Sun and Partial Shade: Proportioned by weight as follows: a. 50 percent Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis). b. 30 percent chewings red fescue (Festuca rubra variety). c. 10 percent perennial ryegrass (Lolium perenne). d. 10 percent redtop (Agrostis alba). 3. Shade: Proportioned by weight as follows: a. 50 percent chewings red fescue (Festuca rubra variety). b. 35 percent rough bluegrass (Poa trivialis). c. 15 percent redtop (Agrostis alba). 1 2.3 PLUGS A. Plugs: Turfgrass sod, certified and approved and Number 1 Quality/Premium, including 1 limitations on thatch, weeds, diseases, nematodes, and insects, complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture, cut into square or round plugs, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted; of the following turfgrass species and plug size: 1. Turfgrass Species: Bermudagrass (Cynodon dactylon); Carpetgrass (Axonopus affmis); 1 Centipedegrass (Eremochloa ophiuroides); St. Augustinegrass (Stenotaphrum secundatum); Zoysiagrass (Zoysia japonica); Zoysiagrass (Zoysia matrella). 2. Plug Size: 2 inches (50 mm). 1 2.4 SPRIGS 1 A. Sod Sprigs: Healthy living stems, rhizomes, or stolons with a minimum of two nodes and attached roots free of soil, of the following turfgrass species: 1 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 6 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 1. Turfgrass Species: Bermudagrass (Cynodon dactylon); Carpetgrass (Axonopus affinis); Centipedegrass (Eremochloa ophiuroides); St. Augustinegrass (Stenotaphrum secundatum); Zoysiagrass (Zoysia japonica); Zoysiagrass (Zoysia matrella). 2. Turfgrass Species: Creeping bentgrass (Agrostis palustris). 2.5 MEADOW GRASSES AND WILDFLOWERS A. Wildflower Seed: Fresh, clean, and dry new seed, of mixed species as follows: 1. Per plans. B. Native Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, and dry new seed, of mixed species as follows: 1. Per plans. C. Wildflower and Native Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, and dry new seed, of mixed species as follows: 1 1. Per plans. D. Seed Carrier: Inert material, sharp clean sand or perlite, mixed with seed at a ratio of not less than two parts seed carrier to one part seed. 2.6 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows: 1. Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36 -mm) sieve and a minimum of 75 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25 -mm) sieve. 2. Class: 0, with a minimum of 95 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36 -mm) sieve and a minimum of 55 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25 -mm) sieve. 3. Provide lime in form of ground dolomitic limestone, calcitic limestone, mollusk shells. B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, and with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 (3.35 -mm) sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through No. 40 (0.425 -mm) sieve. C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur. D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated. E. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade. F. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent passing through No. 50 (0.30 -mm) sieve. G. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials. 1 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 7 1 MGA #053570 08/06 Earth: Calcined, percent silica, with approximately 140 H. Diatomaceous ed, p pp y percent water p absorption capacity by weight. I. Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight. 2.7 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Compost: Well- composted, stable, and weed -free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1/2 -inch (12.5 -mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 5 decisiemens /m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: 1. Organic Matter Content: 50 percent of dry weight. 2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or source - separated or compostable mixed solid waste. 1 B. Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8. C. Muck Peat: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed -sedge peat, finely divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, and having a water - absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent. 1 D. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen- treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of uniform texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials. 1 1. In lieu of decomposed wood derivatives, mix partially decomposed wood derivatives with ammonium nitrate at a minimum rate of 0.15 lb /cu. ft. (2.4 kg/cu. M) of loose sawdust or ground bark, or with ammonium sulfate at a minimum rate of 0.25 lb /cu. ft. (4 kg/cu. m) of loose sawdust or ground bark. E. Manure: Well- rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, and material harmful to plant growth. 2.8 FERTILIZERS A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 10 percent phosphoric acid. B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available 1 phosphoric acid. C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial -grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow - release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 1 lb /1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m) of actual nitrogen, 4 percent 1 phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight. 1 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 8 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil - testing laboratory. D. Slow- Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water - insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight. 2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium m amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil - testing laboratory. 2.9 PLANTING SOILS A. Planting Soil: ASTM D 5268 topsoil, with pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 2 percent 1 organic material content; free of stones 1 inch (25 mm) or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Mix ASTM D 5268 topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil: 1 1. Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:4 or per plan. 2. Ratio of Loose Sphagnum or Muck Peat to Topsoil by Volume: 1:4 or per plan. 3. Ratio of Loose Wood Derivatives to Topsoil by Volume: 1:4 or per plan. 4. Weight of Lime per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 5. Weight of Sulfur; Iron Sulfate Aluminum Sulfate per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 1 6. Weight of Agricultural Gypsum per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 7. Volume of Sand Plus 10 Percent Diatomaceous Earth; Zeolites per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. . 8. Weight of Bonemeal per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 9. Weight of Superphosphate per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 10. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 11. Weight of Slow- Release Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. B. Planting Soil: Existing, native surface topsoil formed under natural conditions with the duff layer retained during excavation process and stockpiled on -site. Verify suitability of native surface topsoil to produce viable planting soil. Clean soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1. Supplement with another specified planting soil when quantities are insufficient. 2. Mix existing, native surface topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers m the following quantities to produce planting soil: 1 a. Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:4 or per plans. b. Ratio of Loose Sphagnum; and Muck Peat to Topsoil by Volume: 1:4 or per plans. c. Ratio of Loose Wood Derivatives to Topsoil by Volume: 1:4 or per plans. d. Weight of Lime per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): 1:4 or per plans. e. Weight of Sulfur; and Iron Sulfate; and Aluminum Sulfate per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. f. Weight of Agricultural Gypsum per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. g. Volume of Sand Plus 10 Percent Diatomaceous Earth; and Zeolites per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 9 1 MGA #053570 08/06 h. Weight of Bonemeal per 1000 S . Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per � . m plans. P q ( q) P P i. Weight of Superphosphate per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. j. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. k. Weight of Slow- Release Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. C. Planting Soil LO1 and L02: Existing, in -place surface soil. Verify suitability of existing surface soil to produce viable planting soil. Remove stones, roots, plants, sod, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Mix surface soil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil: 1. Ratio of Loose Compost to Surface Soil by Volume: 1:4 or per plans. 2. Ratio of Loose Sphagnum; and Muck Peat to Surface Soil by Volume: 1:4 or per plans. 3. Ratio of Loose Wood Derivatives to Surface Soil by Volume: per plans. 4. Weight of Lime per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 5. Weight of Sulfur; Iron Sulfate; Aluminum Sulfate per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 6. Weight of Agricultural Gypsum per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 7. Volume of Sand Plus 10 Percent Diatomaceous Earth; Zeolites per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 8. Weight of Bonemeal per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 9. Weight of Superphosphate per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 10. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 11. Weight of Slow- Release Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. D. Planting Soil LO1 and L02: Imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off -site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well - drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches (100 mm) deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes. 1. Additional Properties of Imported Topsoil or Manufactured Topsoil: Screened and free of stones 1 inch (25 mm) or larger in any dimension; free of roots, plants, sod, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofmg compound, acid, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth; free of obnoxious weeds and invasive plants including quackgrass, Johnsongrass, poison ivy, nutsedge, nimblewill, Canada thistle, bindweed, bentgrass, wild garlic, ground ivy, perennial sorrel, and bromegrass; not infested with nematodes, grubs, other pests, pest eggs, or other undesirable organisms and disease - causing plant pathogens; friable and with sufficient structure to give good filth and aeration. Continuous, air- filled, pore -space content on a volume /volume basis shall be at least 15 percent when moisture is present at field capacity. Soil shall have a field capacity of at least 15 percent on a dry weight basis. 2. Mix imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil: a. Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:4. 1 b. Ratio of Loose Sphagnum; and Muck] Peat to Topsoil by Volume: per plans. c. Ratio of Loose Wood Derivatives to Topsoil by Volume: per plans. d. Weight of Lime per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. e. Weight of Sulfur; Iron Sulfate; Aluminum Sulfate per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 1 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 10 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 I A ultural Gypsum per 1000 S . Ft. (92.9 S . m : per f. Weight of gnc yp plans. p q ( q ) p p g. Volume of Sand Plus 10 Percent Diatomaceous Earth; Zeolites per 1000 Sq. Ft. ' (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. h. Weight of Bonemeal per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. i. Weight of Superphosphate per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. j. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. k. Weight of Slow- Release Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. E. Lightweight On- Structure Planting Soil LO1 and L02: Mix produced by modifying planting soil as follows: 1. Planting Soil LO1 and L02: one (1) part(s), except replace all of sand content with ' perlite. 2. Additional Perlite: One (1) part(s). 3. Additional Sphagnum; and Muck Peat: one (1) part(s). 1 4. Additional Lime: Ground dolomitic limestone; calcitic limestone; mollusk shells applied at the rate of 3 lb per cu. yd. (1.36 kg per cu. M). 1 2.10 MULCHES A. Straw Mulch: Provide air -dry, clean, mildew- and seed -free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or barley. B. Sphagnum Peat Mulch: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or of 1 granular texture, and with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8. C. Muck Peat Mulch: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed -sedge peat, finely divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, and having a water - absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent. D. Compost Mulch: Well- composted, stable, and weed -free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1 -inch (25 -mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 2 to 5 decisiemens /m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: 1. Organic Matter Content 50 percent of dry weight. 2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or 1 source- separated or compostable mixed solid waste. E. Fiber Mulch: Biodegradable, dyed -wood, cellulose -fiber mulch; nontoxic and free of plant - growth or germination inhibitors; with a maximum moisture content of 15 percent and a pH range of 4.5 to 6.5. F. Nonasphaltic Tackifier: Colloidal tackifier recommended by fiber -mulch manufacturer for 1 slurry application; nontoxic and free of plant - growth or germination inhibitors. G. Asphalt Emulsion: ASTM D 977, Grade SS -1; nontoxic and free of plant- growth or 1 germination inhibitors. TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 11 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2.11 PESTICIDES 1 A. General: Pesticide, registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. 1 B. Pre - Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non - Selective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer. C. Post - Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non - Selective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated. 1 2.12 EROSION - CONTROL MATERIALS 1 A. Erosion - Control Blankets: Biodegradable wood excelsior, straw, or coconut -fiber mat enclosed in a photodegradable plastic mesh. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches (150 mm) long. B. Erosion- Control Fiber Mesh: Biodegradable burlap or spun -coir mesh, a minimum of 0.92 lb /sq. yd. (0.5 kg/sq. m), with 50 to 65 percent open area. Include manufacturer's recommended 1 steel wire staples, 6 inches (150 mm) long. C. Erosion - Control Mats: Cellular, non - biodegradable slope - stabilization mats designed to isolate and contain small areas of soil over steeply sloped surface, of 3 -inch (75 -mm) nominal mat thickness. Include manufacturer's recommended anchorage system for slope conditions. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Invisible Structures, Inc.; Slopetame 2. 1 b. Presto Products Company, a business of Alcoa; Geoweb. c. Tenax Corporation - USA; Tenweb. 1 2.13 GRASS -PAVING MATERIALS A. Grass Paving: Cellular, non - biodegradable plastic mats, designed to contain small areas of soil 1 and enhance the ability of turf to support vehicular and pedestrian traffic, of manufacturer's standard nominal mat thickness. Include manufacturer's recommended anchorage system for slope conditions. 1 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following : 1 a. Grid Technologies, Inc.; Netlon 50. b. Invisible Structures, Inc.; Grasspave2. c. NDS, Inc.; Tufftrack; Grassroad Paver8 Plus. 1 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 12 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 r Products Company, a business of Alcoa; d. Presto Geoblock Porous Pavement Alcoa; 1 System. e. RK Manufacturing, Inc.; Grassy Pavers. B. Base Course: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8; 1 Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for base - course material. C. Sand: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with gradation ' requirements in ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate. D. Proprietary Growing Mix: As submitted and acceptable to Architect. ' E. Sandy Loam Soil Mix: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with gradation requirements in ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate blended with planting soil LO1 and L02 as specified. Use blend consisting of 1/2 sand and 1/2 planting soil. F. Soil for Paving Fill: Planting soil LO1 and L02 as specified. 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 1 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting 1 performance. 1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, ' concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area. 2. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions. 3. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. 4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations. 1. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding and hydromulching overspray. 2. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them. 1 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 13 1 MGA #053570 08/06 h 1 B. Install erosion- control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil - bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. 3.3 TURF AREA PREPARATION A. Limit turf subgrade preparation to areas to be planted. 1 B. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 6 inches (150 min) and per 111 geotechnical report. Remove stones larger than 2 inches (50 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. 2. Thoroughly blend planting soil off -site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil. a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a few 1 days. b. Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer. 3. Spread planting soil to a depth of 6 inches (150 mm but not less than required to meet fmish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. 1 a. Spread approximately 1/2 the thickness of planting soil over loosened subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 4 inches (100 mm) of subgrade. Spread remainder of planting soil. b. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod. C. Unchanged Subgrades: If turf is to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, 1 grading, or surface -soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows: 1. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil. 1 2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches (150 mm). Apply soil amendments and fertilizers according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 6 inches (150 mm) of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture. 1 a. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to surface soil before loosening. 3. Remove stones larger than 2 inches (50 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, 1 and other extraneous matter. 4. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's 1 property. D. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) of fmish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet fmish grades. Limit fmish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future. E. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry 1 before planting. Do not create muddy soil. 1 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 14 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 F. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. 3.4 PREPARATION FOR EROSION - CONTROL MATERIALS A. Prepare area as specified in "Turf Area Preparation" Article. B. For erosion - control mats, install planting soil in two lifts, with second lift equal to thickness of erosion - control mats. Install erosion - control mat and fasten as recommended by material manufacturer. 1 C. Fill cells of erosion - control mat with planting soil and compact before planting. D. For erosion - control blanket or mesh, install from top of slope, working downward, and as recommended by material manufacturer for site conditions. Fasten as recommended by material manufacturer. E. Moisten prepared area before planting if surface is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. 1 3.5 PREPARATION FOR GRASS - PAVING MATERIALS A. Reduce subgrade elevation soil to allow for thickness of grass- paving system. Grade planting ' areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade so that installed paving is within plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions. 1 B. Install base course and sand course and sandy loam soil mix and proprietary growing mix and soil for paving fill as recommended by paving- material manufacturer for site conditions; comply with details shown on Drawings. Compact according to paving - material manufacturer's written instructions. C. Install paving mat and fasten according to paving- material manufacturer's written instructions. ' D. Before planting, fill cells of paving mat with planting soil; and sandy loam soil mix; and proprietary growing mix; and sand half full and compact according to manufacturer's written 1 instructions. E. Moisten prepared area before planting if surface is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. 3.6 SEEDING 1 A. Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at 1 right angles to each other. 1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged. 1 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 15 1 MGA #053570 08/06 against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting 2. Do not seed a g g g P g saucer. B. Sow seed at a total rate of 5 to 8 lb /1000 sq. ft. (2.3 to 3.6 kg/92.9 sq. m) or per plans. C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch (3 mm) of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray. 1 D. Protect seeded areas with slopes exceeding 1:4 with erosion - control blankets and 1:6 with erosion - control fiber mesh installed and stapled according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Protect seeded areas with erosion - control mats where shown on Drawings; install and anchor according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1 F. Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6 by spreading straw mulch. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons /acre (42 kg/92.9 sq. m) to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches (38 min) in loose thickness over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment. 1. Anchor straw mulch by crimping into soil with suitable mechanical equipment. 1 2. Bond straw mulch by spraying with asphalt emulsion at a rate of 10 to 13 gal. /1000 sq. ft. (38 to 49 L/92.9 sq. m). Take precautions to prevent damage or staining of structures or other plantings adjacent to mulched areas. Immediately clean damaged or stained areas. 1 G. Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying compost mulch and peat mulch and planting soil within 24 hours after completing seeding operations. Soak areas, scatter mulch uniformly to a thickness of 3/16 inch (4.8 mm), and roll surface smooth. 3.7 HYDROSEEDING 1 A. Hydroseeding: Mix specified seed, fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using equipment specifically designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into 1 homogeneous slurry suitable for hydraulic application. 1. Mix slurry with nonasphaltic; asphalt - emulsion; fiber -mulch manufacturer's recommended tackifier. 2. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a one -step process. Apply slurry at a rate so that mulch component is deposited at not less than 1500 -1b /acre (15.6- kg/92.9 sq. m) dry weight, and seed component is deposited at not less than the specified seed - sowing rate. 3. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a two -step process. Apply first slurry coat at a rate so that mulch component is deposited at not less than 500 -1b /acre (5.2- kg/92.9 sq. m) dry weight, and seed component is deposited at not less than the specified seed - sowing rate. Apply slurry cover coat of fiber mulch (hydromulching) at a rate of 10001b /acre (10.4 kg/92.9 sq. m). 1 1 1 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 16 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 3.8 SODDING 1 A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy. B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade, ' eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass. ' 1. Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3. 2. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs or steel staples spaced as recommended by sod manufacturer but not less than 2 anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage. C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) below sod. 3.9 PLUGGING A. Plant plugs in holes or furrows, spaced 12 inches (300 mm) apart in both directions. On slopes, contour furrows to near level. 1 3.10 SPRIGGING A. Plant freshly shredded sod sprigs in furrows 2 -1/2 to 3 inches (64 to 75 mm) deep. Place individual sprigs with roots and portions of stem in moistened soil, 6 inches (150 mm) apart in 1 rows 18 inches (450 mm) apart, and fill furrows without covering growing tips. Lightly roll and firm soil around sprigs after planting. B. Broadcast sprigs uniformly over prepared surface at a rate of 10 cu. ft. /1000 sq. ft. (0.28 1 cu. m/92.9 sq. m) and mechanically force sprigs into lightly moistened soil. 1. Spread a 1/4 -inch- (6 -mm -) thick layer of compost mulch and peat mulch and planting soil] on sprigs. 2. Lightly roll and firm soil around sprigs after planting. 3. Water sprigs immediately after planting and keep moist by frequent watering until well 1 rooted. 3.11 TURF RENOVATION 1 A. Renovate existing turf. 1 B. Renovate existing turf damaged by Contractor's operations, such as storage of materials or equipment and movement of vehicles. 1 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 17 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1. Reestablish turf where settlement or washouts occur or where minor regrading is �' g required. 2. Install new planting soil as required. 1 C. Remove sod and vegetation from diseased or unsatisfactory turf areas; do not bury in soil. D. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials such as oil drippings, fuel spills, stones, gravel, and other construction materials resulting from Contractor's operations, and replace with new planting soil. 1 E. Mow, dethatch, core aerate, and rake existing turf. F. Remove weeds before seeding. Where weeds are extensive, apply selective herbicides as required. Do not use pre- emergence herbicides. G. Remove waste and foreign materials, including weeds, soil cores, grass, vegetation, and turf, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. H. Till stripped, bare, and compacted areas thoroughly to a soil depth of 6 inches (150 mm). I. Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers required for establishing new turf and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches (100 mm) of existing soil. Install new planting soil to fill low spots and meet finish grades. 1 J. Apply seed and protect with straw mulch and sod as required for new turf. K. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new turf is established. 3.12 TURF MAINTENANCE 1 A. Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf'. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation. 1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. 2. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement. 3. Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of 1 pesticides and reduce hazards. B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and turf - watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches (100 mm). 1 1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas. 1 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 18 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 2. Water turf with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch (25 mm) per week unless rainfall ' precipitation is adequate. C. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass -leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain the following grass height: 1 1. Mow bentgrass to a height of 1/2 inch (13 mm) or less. 2. Mow bermudagrass to a height of 1/2 to 1 inch (13 to 25 mm). ' 3. Mow carpetgrass and centipedegrass and perennial ryegrass and zoysiagrass to a height of 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm). 4. Mow Kentucky bluegrass and buffalograss and annual ryegrass and chewings red fescue to a height of 1 -1/2 to 2 inches (38 to 50 mm). 5. Mow bahiagrass and turf -type tall fescue and St. Augustinegrass to a height of 2 to 3 inches (50 to 75 mm). 1 D. Turf Postfertilization: Apply fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry. 1. Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb /1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 1 sq. m) to turf area. 3.13 SATISFACTORY TURF 1 A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect: ' 1. Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. (0.92 sq. m) and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches (125 by 125 mm). 2. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well- rooted, even - colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities. 3. Satisfactory Plugged Turf: At end of maintenance period, the required number of plugs has been established as well - rooted, viable patches of grass, and areas between plugs are free of weeds and other undesirable vegetation. ' 4. Satisfactory Sprigged Turf: At end of maintenance period, the required number of sprigs has been established as well- rooted, viable plants, and areas between sprigs are free of weeds and other undesirable vegetation. 1 B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory. 1 3.14 MEADOW ' A. Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other. 1 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 19 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged. B. Sow seed at a total rate of 4 oz. /1000 sq. ft. (113 g/92.9 sq. m). 1 C. Brush seed into top 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray. D. Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying peat or compost mulch within 24 hours after completing seeding operations. Soak areas, scatter mulch uniformly to a thickness of 3/16 inch (4.8 mm), and roll surface smooth. E. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until meadow is established. 3.15 MEADOW MAINTENANCE A. Maintain and establish meadow by watering, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish a healthy, viable meadow. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation. 1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace materials and meadow damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. 2. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement. 3. Apply treatments as required to keep meadow and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and meadow - watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep meadow uniformly moist. 1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas. 2. Water meadow with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1/2 inch (13 mm) per week for eight (8) weeks after planting unless rainfall precipitation is adequate. 1 3.16 PESTICIDE APPLICATION A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed. B. Post- Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non - Selective): Apply only as necessary to treat already - germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. 1 1 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 20 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 ' 3.17 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION 1 A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas. ' B. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after plantings are established. 1 C. Remove nondegradable erosion - control measures after grass establishment period. 1 END OF SECTION 329200 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 21 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 SECTION 329300 - PLANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plants. ' 2. Planting soils. 3. Tree stabilization. 4. Landscape edgings. 5. Tree grates. ' B. Related Sections: ' 1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" for protecting, trimming, pruning, repairing, and replacing existing trees to remain that interfere with, or are affected by, execution of the Work. 2. Division 12 Section "Interior Planters and Artificial Plants" for live and artificial interior plants and planters. 3. Division 12 Section "Site Furnishings" for exterior unit planters. 4. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for protection of existing trees and plantings, topsoil stripping and stockpiling, and site clearing. 5. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation, filling, and rough grading and for subsurface aggregate drainage and drainage backfill materials. 6. Division 32 Section "Turf and Grasses" for turf (lawn) and meadow planting, hydroseeding, and erosion - control materials. 7. Division 33 Section "Subdrainage" for below -grade drainage of landscaped areas, paved areas, and wall perimeters. 1.3 ALLOWANCES A. Allowances for plants are specified in Division 01 Section "Allowances." ' 1. Perform planting work under quantity allowances and only as authorized. Authorized work includes work required by Drawings and the Specifications and only work authorized in writing by Architect. 2. Notify Architect weekly of extent of work performed that is attributable to quantity allowances. 3. Perform work that exceeds quantity allowances only as authorized by Change Orders. 1 PLANTS 329300 - 1 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 B. Furnish trees as p art of tree allowance. C. Furnish trees and plants per LO1 and L02 as part of the project and per plans. 1 1.4 UNIT PRICES 1 A. Work of this Section is affected by unit prices specified in Division 01 Section "Unit Prices." 1. Unit prices apply to authorized work covered by quantity allowances. 1 2. Unit prices apply to additions to and deletions from Work as authorized by Change Orders. 1 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. 1 B. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they were grown, with ball size not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required; wrapped with burlap, tied, rigidly supported, and drum laced with twine with the root flare visible at the surface of the ball as recommended by ANSI Z60.1. C. Balled and Potted Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown and placed, unbroken, in a container. Ball size is not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required. D. Bare -Root Stock: Plants with a well - branched, fibrous -root system developed by transplanting or root pruning, with soil or growing medium removed, and with not less than minimum root 1 spread according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required. E. Container -Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well- rooted plants grown in a container, with a well - established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required. F. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, 1 twigs, and detritus. G. Fabric Bag -Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well- rooted plants established and grown in- 1 ground in a porous fabric bag with well - established root system reaching sides of fabric bag. Fabric bag size is not less than diameter, depth, and volume required by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant. 1 H. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. I. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off -site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand 1 with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil. J. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a 1 pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and 1 PLANTS 329300 - 2 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, molluscicides. p gu , ' defoliant, or desiccant. K. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents 1 (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses. L. Planting Area: Areas to be planted. 1 M. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in -place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and ' perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. N. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs, vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation. 0. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the 1 stem or trunk. P. Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of trees below the soil surface. 1 Q. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed. ' R. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms. ' S. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil. 1.6 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including soils. 1. Plant Materials: Include quantities, sizes, quality, and sources for plant materials. ' 2. Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to the Project. 3. Plant Photographs: Include color photographs in digital 3- by 5 -inch (76- by 127 -mm) print format of each required species and size of plant material as it will be furnished to the Project. Take photographs from an angle depicting true size and condition of the typical plant to be furnished. Include a scale rod or other measuring device in each photograph. For species where more than 20 plants are required, include a minimum of ' three photographs showing the average plant, the best quality plant, and the worst quality plant to be furnished. Identify each photograph with the full scientific name of the plant, plant size, and name of the growing nursery. 1 B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following: 1 PLANTS 329300 - 3 11 MGA #053570 08/06 1. Trees and Shrubs: Three samples of each variety and size delivered to the site for review. P h' Maintain approved samples on -site as a standard for comparison. 2. Organic and Compost Mulch: 1 -pint (0.5- liter) and 1 -quart (1- liter)] <Insert quantity> volume of each organic mulch required; in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage of weight and source of mulch. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of color, texture, and organic makeup. 3. Mineral Mulch: [2 lb (1.0 kg)] [5 lb (2.5 kg)] <Insert quantity> of each mineral mulch required, in sealed plastic bags labeled with source of mulch. Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be delivered and installed on the site; provide an accurate indication of color, texture, and makeup of the material. 4. Weed Control Barrier: 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm). 5. Edging Materials and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard size, to verify color selected. 6. Tree Grates[, Frames,] and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard size[ delivered to the site for review], to verify design[ and color] selected. 7. Root Barrier: Width of panel by 12 inches (300 mm). 1 C. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer. Include list of similar projects completed by Installer demonstrating Installer's capabilities and experience. Include project names, addresses, and year completed, and include names and addresses of owners' contact persons. D. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and 1 complying with the following: 1. Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard products. 2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable. E. Material Test Reports: For standardized ASTM D 5268 topsoil and existing native surface topsoil and existing in -place surface soil and imported or manufactured topsoil. F. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of plants during a calendar year. Submit before start of required maintenance periods. G. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of plants. 1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association. 2. Experience: Five (5) years' experience in landscape installation in addition to requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full -time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress. 4. Personnel Certifications: Installer's field supervisor assigned to the Work shall have certification in all of the following categories from the Professional Landcare Network: 1 PLANTS 329300 - 4 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 a. Certified Landscape Technician - Exterior, with installation, maintenance, irrigation specialty area(s), designated CLT- Exterior. ' b. Certified Landscape Technician - Interior, designated CLT - Interior. c. Certified Ornamental Landscape Professional, designated COLP. 1 5. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial. B. Soil- Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent or university laboratory, recognized by ' the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed. C. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a ' qualified soil - testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant- nutrient content of the soil. 1 1. Testing methods and written recommendations shall comply with USDA's Handbook No. 60. ' 2. The soil - testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling; with depth, location, and number of samples to be taken per instructions from Architect. A minimum of three (3) representative samples shall be taken from varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for planting purposes. 3. Report suitability of tested soil for plant growth. a. Based upon the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil 1 amendments to be incorporated. State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft. (92.9 sq. m) or volume per cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting ' soil suitable for healthy, viable plants. b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals, including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action. D. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable 1 requirements in ANSI Z60.1. 1. Selection of plants purchased under allowances will be made by Architect, who will tag plants at their place of growth before they are prepared for transplanting. E. Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. 1 1. Trees and Shrubs: Measure with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Take height measurements from or near the top of the root flare for field -grown stock and container grown stock. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not ' measure branches or roots tip to tip. Take caliper measurements 6 inches (150 mm) above the root flare for trees up to 4 -inch (100 -mm) caliper size, and 12 inches (300 mm) above the root flare for larger sizes. 2. Other Plants: Measure with stems, petioles, and foliage in their normal position. 1 PLANTS 329300 - 5 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 F. Plant Material Observation: Architect may observe plant material either at place of growth or at Y P P ?� site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, cultivar, size, and quality. Architect retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, pests, disease symptoms, injuries, and latent defects and to reject �f unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site. 1 1. Notify Architect of sources of planting materials seven (7) days in advance of delivery to site. G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws if applicable. B. Bulk Materials: 1 1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants. 1 2. Provide erosion - control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil - bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways. 3. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers, lime, and soil amendments with appropriate certificates. C. Deliver bare -root stock plants freshly dug. Immediately after digging up bare -root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting. D. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind bum, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind -tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling. E. Handle planting stock by root ball. 1 F. Store bulbs, corms, and tubers in a dry place at 60 to 65 deg F (16 to 18 deg C) until planting. G. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees m their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 1. Heel -in bare -root stock. Soak roots that are in dry condition in water for two hours. Reject dried -out plants. 1 PLANTS 329300 - 6 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other acceptable material. 3. Do not remove container -grown stock from containers before time of planting. 4. Water root systems of plants stored on -site deeply and thoroughly with a fine -mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but not overly -wet 1 condition. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with new plantings by field measurements before proceeding with planting work. B. Interruption of Existing Services or Utilities: Do not interrupt services or utilities to facilities ' occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary services or utilities according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect, Construction Manager, Owner no fewer than two (2) days in advance of proposed interruption of each service or utility. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of services or utilities without Architect's, Construction ' Manager's, Owner's written permission. C. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion. ' 1. Spring Planting: April. 2. Fall Planting: September. 1 D. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when • existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be ' obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. E. Coordination with Turf Areas (Lawns): Plant trees, shrubs, and other plants after finish grades 1 are established and before planting turf areas unless otherwise indicated. 1. When planting trees, shrubs, and other plants after planting turf areas, protect turf areas, 1 and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations. ' 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: ' a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control. 1 PLANTS 329300 - 7 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing gP g g g over. c. Faulty performance of tree stabilization, edgings, tree grates. d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Periods from Date of Planting Completion, Substantial Completion: 1 a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months. b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 12 months. c. Annuals: Three (3) months. 3. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum: a. Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season. b. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty period. c. A limit of one replacement of each plant will be required except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with requirements. d. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for replaced plant material. 1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service for Trees and Shrubs: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance period below. 1. Maintenance Period: 24 months from date of planting completion/Substantial Completion and sign off from architect. B. Initial Maintenance Service for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance period below. 1. Maintenance Period: 24 months from date of planting completion/Substantial Completion and sign off from architect. C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options. 1 1 1 PLANTS 329300 - 8 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PLANT MATERIAL ' A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or ' root pruning. Provide well - shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. 1 1. Trees with damaged, crooked, or multiple leaders; tight vertical branches where bark is squeezed between two branches or between branch and trunk ( "included bark "); crossing trunks; cut -off limbs more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter; or with stem girdling roots 1 will be rejected. 2. Collected Stock: Do not use plants harvested from the wild, from native stands, from an established landscape planting, or not grown in a nursery unless otherwise indicated. B. Provide plants of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI Z60.1 for types and form of plants required. Plants of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Architect, with ' a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls. C. Root -Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before 1 planting. D. Labeling: Label each plant of each variety, size, and caliper with a securely attached, ' waterproof tag bearing legible designation of common name and full scientific name, including genus and species. Include nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or cultivar, if applicable for the plant as shown on Drawings. 1 E. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of plants is shown on Drawings, select stock for uniform height and spread, and number the labels to assure symmetry in planting. 1 F. Annuals and Biennials: Provide healthy, disease -free plants of species and variety shown or listed, with well - established root systems reaching to sides of the container to maintain a firm ball, but not with excessive root growth encircling the container. Provide only plants that are 1 acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery and that are in bud but not yet in bloom. 2.2 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows: ' 1. Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36 -mm) sieve and a minimum of 75 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25 -mm) sieve. ' 2. Class: 0, with a minimum of 95 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36 -mm) sieve and a minimum of 55 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25 -mm) sieve. 3. Provide lime in form of ground dolomitic limestone, calcitic limestone, mollusk shells. 1 PLANTS 329300 - 9 1 MGA #053570 08/06 B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, and containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 (3.35 -mm) sieve and a maximum of 10 percent 1 passing through No. 40 (0.425 -mm) sieve. C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur. 1 D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated. E. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade. F. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent passing through No. 50 (0.30 -mm) sieve. G. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials. H. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water absorption capacity by weight. I. Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight. 1 2.3 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS 1 A. Compost: Well- composted, stable, and weed -free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 5 decisiemens /m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: 1. Organic Matter Content: 50 percent of dry weight. 1 2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or source - separated or compostable mixed solid waste. B. Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8. C. Muck Peat: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed -sedge peat, finely divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, and having a water - absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent. D. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen- treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of uniform texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials. 1. In lieu of decomposed wood derivatives, mix partially decomposed wood derivatives with ammonium nitrate at a minimum rate of 0.15 lb /cu. ft. (2.4 kg/cu. m) of loose sawdust or ground bark, or with ammonium sulfate at a minimum rate of [0.25 lb /cu. ft. (4 kg/cu. m) of loose sawdust or ground bark. E. Manure: Well- rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, debris, and material harmful to plant growth. 1 PLANTS 329300 - 10 1. 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 2.4 FERTILIZERS 1 A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 20 percent phosphoric acid. ' B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid. ' C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial -grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow - release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1 1. Composition: 1 lb /1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m) of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight. 2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil - testing laboratory. D. Slow- Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water - insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium m the following composition: 1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by ' weight. 2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil - testing laboratory. ' E. Planting Tablets: Tightly compressed chip type, long - lasting, slow - release, commercial -grade planting fertilizer in tablet form. Tablets shall break down with soil bacteria, converting nutrients into a form that can be absorbed by plant roots. ' 1. Size: 5 -gram tablets. 2. Nutrient Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5 percent ' potassium, by weight plus micronutrients. F. Chelated Iron: Commercial -grade FeEDDHA for dicots and woody plants, and commercial - grade FeDTPA for ornamental grasses and monocots. 111 2.5 PLANTING SOILS 1 A. Planting Soil L01 and L02: ASTM D 5268 topsoil, with pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 2 percent organic material content; free of stones 1 inch (25 mm) or larger in any dimension and ' other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Mix ASTM D 5268 topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers m the following quantities to produce planting soil: 1. Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volumel :4 or per plans. 1 2. Ratio of Loose Sphagnum and Muck Peat to Topsoil by Volume: per plans. 3. Ratio of Loose Wood Derivatives to Topsoil by Volume: per plans. 4. Weight of Lime per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. ' 5. Weight of Sulfur, lion Sulfate, Aluminum Sulfate per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 6. Weight of Agricultural Gypsum per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 1 PLANTS 329300 - 11 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 7. Volume of Sand Plus 10 Percent Diatomaceous Earth, Zeolites 92.9 er 1000 S . Ft. P q ( Sq. m): per plans. 8. Weight of Bonemeal per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 9. Weight of Superphosphate per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 10. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 11. Weight of Slow- Release Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 1 B. Planting Soil LO1 and L02: Existing, native surface topsoil formed under natural conditions with the duff layer retained during excavation process and stockpiled on -site. Verify suitability of native surface topsoil to produce viable planting soil. Clean soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1. Supplement with another specified planting soil when quantities are insufficient. 2. Mix existing, native surface topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil: a. Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:4 or per plans. b. Ratio of Loose Sphagnum and Muck Peat to Topsoil by Volume: per plans. c. Ratio of Loose Wood Derivatives to Topsoil by Volume: per plans. d. Weight of Lime per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. e. Weight of Sulfur and Iron Sulfate and Aluminum Sulfate per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. f. Weight of Agricultural Gypsum per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. g. Volume of Sand Plus 10 Percent Diatomaceous Earth and Zeolites per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. h. Weight of Bonemeal per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. i. Weight of Superphosphate per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. j. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. k. Weight of Slow- Release Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 1 C. Planting Soil LO1 and L02: Existing, in -place surface soil. Verify suitability of existing surface soil to produce viable planting soil. Remove stones, roots, plants, sod, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Mix surface soil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil: 1. Ratio of Loose Compost to Surface Soil by Volume: 1:4 or per plans. 2. Ratio of Loose Sphagnum and Muck Peat to Surface Soil by Volume: per plans. 3. Ratio of Loose Wood Derivatives to Surface Soil by Volume: per plans. 4. Weight of Lime per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 5. Weight of [Sulfur] [Iron Sulfate] [Aluminum Sulfate] per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 6. Weight of Agricultural Gypsum per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 7. Volume of Sand Plus 10 Percent Diatomaceous Earth and Zeolites per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 8. Weight of Bonemeal per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 9. Weight of Superphosphate per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 10. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 11. Weight of Slow- Release Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. 1 PLANTS 329300 - 12 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 D. Planting Soil LO1 and L02: Imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off -site sources. 1 Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well - drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches (100 mm) deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs, or marshes. 1. Additional Properties of Imported Topsoil or Manufactured Topsoil: Screened and free ' of stones 1 inch (25 mm) or larger in any dimension; free of roots, plants, sod, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, ' turpentine, tar, roofmg compound, acid, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth; free of obnoxious weeds and invasive plants including quackgrass, Johnsongrass, poison ivy, nutsedge, nimblewill, Canada thistle, bindweed, bentgrass, wild garlic, ' ground ivy, perennial sorrel, and bromegrass; not infested with nematodes; grubs; or other pests, pest eggs, or other undesirable organisms and disease - causing plant pathogens; friable and with sufficient structure to give good tilth and aeration. Continuous, air- filled pore space content on a volume /volume basis shall be at least 15 ' percent when moisture is present at field capacity. Soil shall have a field capacity of at least 15 percent on a dry weight basis. 2. Mix imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil with the following soil amendments and 1 fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil: a. Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:4 or per plans. b. Ratio of Loose Sphagnum and Muck Peat to Topsoil by Volume: per plans. c. Ratio of Loose Wood Derivatives to Topsoil by Volume: per plans. d. Weight of Lime per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. e. Weight of Sulfur and Iron Sulfate and Aluminum Sulfate per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 ' Sq. m): per plans. f. Weight of Agricultural Gypsum per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. g. Volume of Sand Plus 10 Percent Diatomaceous Earth and Zeolites per 1000 Sq. Ft. ' (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. h. Weight of Bonemeal per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. i. Weight of Superphosphate per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. ' j. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. k. Weight of Slow- Release Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): per plans. ' E. Lightweight On- Structure Planting Soil LO1 and L02: Mix produced by modifying planting soil as follows: 1. Planting Soil LO1 and L02: One part(s), except replace all of sand content with perlite. 1 2. Additional Perlite: One part(s). 3. Additional Spagnum and Muck Peat: One part(s). 4. Additional Lime: Ground dolomitic limestone and calcitic limestone and mollusk shells 1 applied at the rate of 3 lb per cu. yd. (1.36 kg per cu. m) ' 2.6 MULCHES A. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following: 1 PLANTS 329300 - 13 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1. Type: Shredded hardwood and Ground or shredded bark and Wood and bark chips and YP P Pine straw and Salt hay or threshed straw and Pine needles and Peanut, pecan, and cocoa - bean shells. 2. Size Range: 3 inches (76 mm) maximum, 1/2 inch (13 mm) minimum. 3. Color: Natural. B. Compost Mulch: Well- composted, stable, and weed -free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1 -inch (25 -mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 2 decisiemens /m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: 1. Organic Matter Content: 50 percent of dry weight. 2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or source - separated or compostable mixed solid waste. C. Mineral Mulch: Hard, durable stone, washed free of loam, sand, clay, and other foreign substances, of following type, size range, and color: 1. Type: Rounded riverbed gravel or smooth -faced stone and Crushed stone or gravel and Marble chips and Granite chips. 2. Size Range: 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) maximum, 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum. 3. Color: Uniform tan-beige color range acceptable to Architect and Readily available natural gravel color range. 2.7 WEED- CONTROL BARRIERS 1 A. Nonwoven Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz. /sq. yd. (101g/sq. m) minimum, composed of fibers formed into a stable network so that fibers retain their relative position. Fabric shall be inert to biological degradation and resist naturally- encountered chemicals, alkalis, and acids. B. Composite Fabric: Woven, needle - punched polypropylene substrate bonded to a nonwoven 1 polypropylene fabric, 4.8 oz. /sq. yd. (162 g/sq. m). 2.8 PESTICIDES 1 A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Pre - Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non - Selective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer. 1 C. Post- Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non - Selective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated. 1 PLANTS 329300 - 14 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 2.9 TREE STABILIZATION MATERIALS 1 A. Stakes and Guys: 1. Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough -sawn, sound, new hardwood and softwood with specified wood pressure - preservative treatment], free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2 -by -2 -inch nominal (38- by -38 -mm actual) by length indicated, pointed at one end. 2. Wood Deadmen: Timbers measuring 8 inches (200 mm) in diameter and 48 inches (1200 mm) long, treated with specified wood pressure - preservative treatment. 3. Flexible Ties: Wide rubber or elastic bands or straps of length required to reach stakes or ' turnbuckles and compression springs. 4. Guys and Tie Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1, galvanized -steel wire, two- strand, twisted, 0.106 inch (2.7 mm) in diameter. 5. Tree -Tie Webbing: UV- resistant polypropylene or nylon webbing with brass grommets. 6. Guy Cables: Five - strand, 3/16 -inch- (4.8 -mm -) diameter, galvanized -steel cable, with zinc - coated turnbuckles and compression springs, a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) long, with two 3/8 -inch (10 -mm) galvanized eyebolts. 7. Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white, 6 inches (150 mm) long. 8. Proprietary Staking- and - Guying Devices: Proprietary stake and adjustable tie systems to secure each new planting by plant stem; sized as indicated and per manufacturer's written ' recommendations. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Arborbrace; ArborBrace Tree Guying System. 2) Decorations for Generations, Inc.; Reddy Stake and Mega Stake System. 1 3) <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation >. B. Root -Ball Stabilization Materials: 1. Upright Stakes and Horizontal Hold -Down: Rough -sawn, sound, new hardwood or softwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2 -by -2 -inch nominal (38- by -38 -mm actual) by length indicated; stakes pointed at one end. 2. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. 3. Proprietary Root -Ball Stabilization Devices: Proprietary at- or below -grade stabilization systems to secure each new planting by root ball; sized per manufacturer's written 1 recommendations unless otherwise indicated. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Border Concepts, Inc.; Tomahawk Tree Stabilizers. 1 2) Foresight Products, LLC; Duckbill Rootball Fixing System. 3) Tree Staple, Inc.; Tree Staples. C. Palm Bracing: Battens or blocks, struts, straps, and protective padding as indicated. 1 PLANTS 329300 - 15 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1. Battens or Blocks and Struts: Rough-sawn, sound, new hardwood or softwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2 -by -4 -inch nominal (38- by -89 -mm actual) by lengths indicated. 2. Straps: Adjustable steel or plastic package banding straps. 3. Padding: Burlap. 4. Proprietary Palm- Bracing Devices: Proprietary systems to secure each new planting by trunk; sized per manufacturer's written recommendations unless otherwise indicated. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Arborbrace; ArborBrace Palm Bracing. 2) Horticultural Consultants, Inc.; Oasis Palm Tree Anchoring System. 1 2.10 LANDSCAPE EDGINGS 1 A. Wood Edging: Of sizes shown on Drawings, and wood stakes as follows: 1. Species: Western red cedar, all heart and Southern pine with specified wood pressure- 1 preservative treatment. 2. Stakes: Same species as edging, 1 -by -2 -inch nominal (19- by -38 -mm actual) by 18 inches (450 mm) long, with galvanized nails for anchoring edging. 1 B. Steel Edging: Standard commercial -steel edging, rolled edge, fabricated in sections of standard lengths, with loops stamped from or welded to face of sections to receive stakes. 1 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products per plans or comparable product by one of the following: a. Border Concepts, Inc. b. Collier Metal Specialties, Inc. c. Russell, J. D. Company (The). d. Sure -Loc Edging Corporation. 3. Edging Size: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) wide by 4 inches (100 mm) deep; 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wide by 5 inches (125 mm) deep; 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) wide by 4 inches (100 mm) deep; 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) wide by 4 inches (100 mm) deep] [1/8 inch (3.2 mm) wide by 6 inches (150 mm) deep; 0.1 inch (2.5 mm) wide by 4 inches (100 mm) deep. 4. Stakes: Tapered steel, a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) long. 5. Accessories: Standard tapered ends, corners, and splicers. 6. Finish: Standard paint; Zinc coated; Unfinished. 7. Paint Color: Black or per architectural approval. 1 C. Aluminum Edging: Standard- profile extruded - aluminum edging, ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063 -T6, fabricated in standard lengths with interlocking sections with loops stamped from face of sections to receive stakes. 1 PLANTS 329300 - 16 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products per �j plans or comparable products by one of the following: ■ a. Curv-Rite, Inc. b. Permaloc Corporation. c. Russell, J. D. Company (The). d. Sure -Loc Edging Corporation. 3. Edging Size: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) wide by 5 -1/2 inches (140 mm) deep; 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) wide by 4 inches (100 mm) deep; 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) wide by 5 -1/2 inches (140 mm) deep; 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) wide by 4 inches (100 mm) deep. 4. Stakes: Aluminum, ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6061 -T6, approximately 1- 1 1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 12 inches (300 mm) long. 5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint; Powder -coat paint; Mill (natural aluminum). 6. Paint Color: Black. D. Plastic Edging: Standard black polyethylene or vinyl edging, V- lipped bottom and horizontally grooved, extruded in standard lengths, with 9 -inch (225 -mm) steel angle or plastic stakes. 1 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products per plans or comparable products by one of the following: a. Oly -Ola Edgings, Inc. b. Valley View Industries. 3. Edging Size: 0.1 inch (2.5 mm) wide by 5 inches (125 mm) deep; 0.07 inch (1.8 mm) wide by 5 inches (125 mm) deep. 4. Top Profile: Straight, with top 2 inches (50 mm) being 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick. • 5. Top Profile: Round top, 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter. 6. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard alignment clips or plugs. 1 2.11 TREE GRATES A. Tree Grates and Frames: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 35 (Class 250) or better, gray -iron castings of shape, pattern, and size indicated. B. Tree Grates and Frames: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 35 (Class 250) or better, gray -iron castings and ASTM A 36/A 36M steel -angle frames of shape, pattern, and size indicated; steel frames 1 hot -dip galvanized. C. Shape and Size: As indicated Round, 36 inches (914 mm) in diameter; Round, 72 inches (1828 mm) in diameter; 48 inches (1219 mm) square; 60 inches (1524'mm) square; Rectangular, 36 by 60 inches (914 by 1524 mm); Rectangular, 48 by 72 inches (1219 by 1828 mm) or per plans and approved by architect. 1 PLANTS 329300 - 17 1 MGA #053570 08/06 D. Finish: Per plans and architectural approval. 1. Color: Low -gloss per plans and approval of architect. 2.12 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS 1 A. Wood Pressure- Preservative Treatment: AWPA C2, with waterbome preservative for soil and freshwater use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and containing no arsenic; including ammoniacal copper arsenate, ammoniacal copper zinc arsenate, and chromated copper arsenate. B. Root Barrier: Black, molded, modular panels manufactured with 50 percent recycled polyethylene plastic with ultraviolet inhibitors, 85 mils (2.2 mm) thick, with vertical root deflecting ribs protruding 3/4 inch (19 mm) out from panel, and each panel 18 inches (457 mm) wide. 1 C. Antidesiccant: Water - insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for trees and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Burlap: Non - synthetic, biodegradable. E. Planter Drainage Gravel: Washed, sound crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8. F. Planter Filter Fabric: Woven geotextile manufactured for separation applications and made of polypropylene, polyolefm, or polyester fibers or combination of them. G. Mycorrhizal Fungi: Dry, granular inoculant containing at least 5300 spores per lb (0.45 kg) of vesicular - arbuscular mycorrhizal fungi and 95 million spores per lb (0.45 kg) of ectomycorrhizal fungi, 33 percent hydrogel, and a maximum of 5.5 percent inert material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting 1 installation and performance. 1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofmg compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area. 2. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions. 3. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. 4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. • PLANTS 329300 - 18 MGA #053570 08/06 C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting 1 area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and existing plants from damage caused by planting operations. B. Install erosion - control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil - bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. ' C. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Architect's acceptance of layout 1 before excavating or planting. Make minor adjustments as required. D. Lay out plants at locations directed by Architect. Stake locations of individual trees and shrubs and outline areas for multiple plantings. E. Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks (before wrapping), branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging, handling, and transportation. 1. If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at nursery before moving and again two weeks after planting. F. Wrap trees and shrubs with burlap fabric over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to 1 protect from wind and other damage during digging, handling, and transportation. 3.3 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT A. Loosen subgrade of planting areas to a minimum depth of 6 inches (150 mm). Remove stones larger than 2 inches (50 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. 2. Thoroughly blend planting soil off -site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil]. a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a few days. b. Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer. 3. Spread planting soil to a depth of 8 inches (200 mm)] [12 inches (300 mm) but not less than required to meet fmish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. a. Spread approximately one -half the thickness of planting soil over loosened subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 4 inches (100 mm) of subgrade. Spread remainder of planting soil. PLANTS 329300 - 19 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 B. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. C. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. D. Application of Mycorrhizal Fungi: At time directed by Architect, broadcast dry product uniformly over prepared soil at application rate indicated on Drawings LO1 and L02. 3.4 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45- degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. 1. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and burlapped stock. 2. Excavate at least 12 inches (300 mm) wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate vertical roots for bare -root stock. 3. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the bottom of the root ball. 4. If area under the plant was initially dug too deep, add soil to raise it to the correct level and thoroughly tamp the added soil to prevent settling. 5. Maintain required angles of repose of adjacent materials as shown on the Drawings. Do not excavate subgrades of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or existing improvements. 6. Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours. 7. Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected overnight when unattended by Installer's personnel]. 8. If drain tile is shown on Drawings or required under planting areas, excavate to top of porous backfill over tile. B. Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as planting soil. 1 C. Obstructions: Notify Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations. 1. Hardpan Layer: Drill 6 -inch- (150 -mm -) diameter holes, 24 inches (600 mm) apart, into free - draining strata or to a depth of 10 feet (3 m), whichever is less, and backfill with free - draining material. D. Drainage: Notify Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub planting pits. E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs. 1 1 PLANTS 329300 - 20 '1 MGA #053570 08/06 3.5 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PLANTING A. Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1. If root flare is not visible, remove soil in a level manner from the root ball to where the top -most root emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the root flare, verify that root ball still meets size requirements. B. Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break. C. Set balled and burlapped stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 2 inches (50 mm) above adjacent finish grades. 1. Use planting soil LO1 and L02 for backfill. 2. After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one -half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. 4. Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one -half filled; m 1 amounts recommended in soil reports from soil - testing laboratory. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch (25 mm) from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole. 5. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil. D. Set balled and potted stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 2 inches (50 mm) above adjacent finish grades. 1. Use planting soil per plans on sheets LO1 and L02 for backfill. 2. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant. 3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one -half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. 4. Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one -half filled; in amounts recommended in soil reports from soil - testing laboratory. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch (25 mm) from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole. 5. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil. 1 E. Set fabric bag -grown stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 2 inches (50 mm) above adjacent finish grades. 1. Use planting soil per plans on sheets LO1 and L02 for backfill. 2. Carefully remove root ball from fabric bag without damaging root ball or plant. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one -half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. 1 PLANTS 329300 - 21 1 MGA #053570 08/06 4. Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one -half filled; in I amounts recommended in soil reports from soil - testing laboratory. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch (25 mm) from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole. 5. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil. F. Set and support bare -root stock in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 2 inches (50 I mm) above adjacent finish grade. 1. Use planting soil per plans on sheet LO1 and L02 for backfill. 1 2. Spread roots without tangling or turning toward surface, and carefully work backfill around roots by hand. Puddle with water until backfill layers are completely saturated. Plumb before backfilling, and maintain plumb while working backfill around roots and placing layers above roots. 3. Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one -half filled; in amounts recommended in soil reports from soil - testing laboratory. Place tablets beside i soil-covered roots about 1 inch (25 mm) from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole or touching the roots. 4. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil. 1 G. When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball. 3.6 MECHANIZED TREE SPADE PLANTING Il A. Trees shall be planted with an approved mechanized tree spade at the designated locations. Do not use tree spade to move trees larger than the maximum size allowed for a similar field - grown, balled- and- burlapped root -ball diameter according to ANSI Z60.1, or larger than the II manufacturer's maximum size recommendation for the tree spade being used, whichever is smaller. im i li B. When extracting the tree, center the trunk within the tree spade and move tree with a solid ball of earth. C. Cut exposed roots cleanly during transplanting operations. D. Use the same tree spade to excavate the planting hole as was used to extract and transport the tree. E. Plant trees as shown on Drawings, following procedures in "Tree, Shrub, and Vine Planting" ii Article. F. Where possible, orient the tree in the same direction as in its original location. 1 3.7 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PRUNING A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape. 1 I PLANTS 329300 - 22 1 ,1 MGA #053570 08/06 B. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines as directed by Architect. C. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural character. D. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds. 3.8 TREE STABILIZATION 1 A. Install trunk stabilization as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 2- through 5 -inch (50- through 125 -mm) caliper. Stake trees of less than 2 -inch (50 -mm) caliper only as required to prevent wind tip out. Use a minimum of two stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches (450 mm) below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend to the dimension shown on Drawings above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses. 2. Use two stakes for trees up to 12 feet (3.6 m) high and 2 -1/2 inches (63 mm) or less in caliper; three stakes for trees less than 14 feet (4.2 m) high and up to 4 inches (100 mm) in caliper. Space stakes equally around trees. 3. Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. 4. Support trees with two strands of tie wire, connected to the brass grommets of tree -tie webbing at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. B. Staking and Guying: Stake and guy trees more than 14 feet (4.2 m) in height and more than 3 inches (75 mm) in caliper unless otherwise indicated. Securely attach no fewer than three guys to stakes 30 inches (760 mm) long, driven to grade. ricat d Staking-and-Guying 1. Site -Fab e Method: a. For trees more than 6 inches (150 mm) in caliper, anchor guys to wood deadmen buried at least 36 inches (900 mm) below grade. Provide compression spring for each guy wire and tighten securely. b. Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk and reaching to compression spring. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. c. Support trees with strands of cable or multiple strands of tie wire, connected to the brass grommets of tree -tie webbing at contact points with tree trunk and reaching to compression spring. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. d. Attach flags to each guy wire, 30 inches (760 mm) above finish grade. e. Paint compression springs with luminescent white paint. 2. Proprietary Staking and Guying Device: Install staking and guying system sized and positioned as recommended by manufacturer unless otherwise indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. PLANTS 329300 - 23 1 MGA #053570 08/06 - Stabilization: Install at- or below-grade stabilization system Root Ball Stabihzat on. In at gr stem to secure each new y planting by the root ball unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Hold -Down Method: Place vertical stakes against side of root ball and drive them into subsoil; place horizontal wood hold -down stake across top of root ball and screw at each end to one of the vertical stakes. a. Install stakes of length required to penetrate at least to the dimension shown on Drawings below bottom of backfilled excavation. Saw stakes off at horizontal stake. b. Install screws through horizontal hold -down and penetrating at least 1 inch (25 mm) into stakes. Predrill holes if necessary to prevent splitting wood. c. Install second set of stakes on other side of root trunk for larger trees as indicated. 2. Proprietary Root -Ball Stabilization Device: Install root -ball stabilization system sized and positioned as recommended by manufacturer unless otherwise indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Palm Bracing: Install bracing system at three or more places equally spaced around perimeter of trunk to secure each palm until established unless otherwise indicated. 1. Site - Fabricated Palm - Bracing Method: a. Place battens over padding and secure battens in place around trunk perimeter with at least two straps, tightened to prevent displacement. Ensure that straps do not contact trunk. b. Place diagonal braces and cut to length. Secure upper ends of diagonal braces with galvanized nails into battens or into nail - attached blocks on battens. Do not drive nails, screws, or other securing devices into palm trunk; do not penetrate palm trunk in any fashion. Secure lower ends of diagonal braces with stakes driven into ground to prevent outward slippage of braces. 2. Proprietary Palm - Bracing Device: Install palm - bracing system sized and positioned as recommended by manufacturer unless otherwise indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.9 ROOT- BARRIER INSTALLATION A. Install root barrier where trees are planted within 48 inches (1200 mm) of paving or other 1 hardscape elements, such as walls, curbs, and walkways unless otherwise shown on Drawings. B. Align root barrier vertically with bottom edge angled at 20 degrees away from the paving or other hardscape element and run it linearly along and adjacent to the paving or other hardscape elements to be protected from invasive roots. C. Install root barrier continuously for a distance of 60 inches (1500 mm) in each direction from the tree trunk, for a total distance of 10 feet (3 m) per tree. If trees are spaced closer, use a single continuous piece of root barrier. 1. Position top of root barrier flush with finish grade. PLANTS 329300 - 24 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 r minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) at j 2. Overlap root barrier a mm o ( ) joints. 3. Do not distort or bend root barrier during construction activities. 4. Do not install root barrier surrounding the root ball of tree. • 3.10 PLANTING IN PLANTERS A. Place a layer of drainage gravel at least 4 inches (100 mrn) thick in bottom of planter. Cover bottom with filter fabric and wrap filter fabric 6 inches (150 mm) up on all sides. Duct tape along the entire top edge of the filter fabric, to secure the filter fabric against the sides during the soil - filling process. B. Fill planter with lightweight on- structure planting soil LO1 and L02. Place soil in lightly compacted layers to an elevation of 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) below top of planter, allowing natural settlement. 1 3.11 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING �- A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines 18 inches (450 mm) apart or as indicated per plans in even rows with triangular spacing. B. Use planting soil per plans on sheet LO1 and L02 for backfill. C. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots. D. For rooted cutting plants supplied in flats, plant each in a manner that will minimally disturb the root system but to a depth not less than two nodes. E. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water. 1 F. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil. G. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock. 3.12 PLANTING AREA MULCHING A. Install weed - control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions. Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of 6 inches (150 min) and 1 secure seams with galvanized pins. B. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated. 1. Trees in Turf Areas: Apply organic mulch ring of 2 -inch (50 -mm) average thickness, with 24 -inch (600 -nun) radius around trunks or stems. Do not place mulch within 6 inches (150 mm) of trunks or stems. 2. Organic Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 3 -inch (75 -mm) average thickness of organic mulch extending 12 inches (300 mm) beyond edge of individual planting pit or trench 1 PLANTS 329300 - 25 1 r 1 MGA #053570 08/06 and over whole surface of planting area], and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch within 6 inches (150 min) of trunks or stems. 3. Mineral Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 3 -inch (75 -mm) average thickness of mineral mulch extending 12 inches (300 mm) beyond edge of individual planting pit or trench and over whole surface of planting area], and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch within 3 inches (75 mm) of trunks or stems. 1 3.13 EDGING INSTALLATION A. Wood Edging: Install edging where indicated. Mitre cut joints and connections at a 45 degree angle. Fasten each cut joint or connection with two galvanized nails. Anchor with wood stakes spaced up to 36 inches (900 mm) apart, driven at least 1 inch (25 mm) below top elevation of edging. Use two galvanized nails per stake to fasten edging, of length as needed to penetrate both edging and stake and provide 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) clinch at point. Predrill stakes if needed to avoid splitting. Replace stakes that crack or split during installation process. 1 B. Steel Edging: Install steel edging where indicated according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor with steel stakes spaced approximately 30 inches (760 mm) apart, driven below top elevation of edging. C. Aluminum Edging: Install aluminum edging where indicated according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor with aluminum stakes spaced approximately 36 inches (900 mm) apart, driven below top elevation of edging. D. Plastic Edging: Install plastic edging where indicated according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor with steel stakes spaced approximately 36 inches (900 mm) apart, driven through upper base grooves or V -lip of edging. E. Shovel -Cut Edging: Separate mulched areas from turf areas, curbs, and paving with a 45- degree, 4- to 6 -inch- (100- to 150 -mm -) deep, shovel -cut edge as shown on Drawings. 3.14 TREE GRATE INSTALLATION A. Tree Grates: Set grate segments flush with adjoining surfaces as shown on Drawings. Shim from supporting substrate with soil - resistant plastic. Maintain a 3 -inch- (75 -mm -) minimum growth radius around base of tree; break away units of casting, if necessary, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.15 PLANT MAINTENANCE A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, adjusting and repairing tree - stabilization devices, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. B. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. 1 PLANTS 329300 - 26 1 MGA #053570 08/06 C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated past management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control agents. 3.16 PESTICIDE APPLICATION A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed. B. Pre - Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non - Selective): Apply to tree, shrub, and ground - cover areas in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not apply to seeded areas. C. Post- Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non - Selective): Apply only as necessary to treat already - germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.17 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition. B. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings. C. After installation and before Substantial Completion, remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie tape, labels, wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site. 3.18 DISPOSAL A. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 329300 111 11 111 1 PLANTS 329300 - 27 1 MGA #053570 08/06 111 SECTION 330500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL .� 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 3 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping joining materials. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Sleeves. 5. Identification devices. J11 6. Grout. J11 7. Flowable fill. 8. Piped utility demolition. 9. Piping system common requirements. 10. Equipment installation common requirements. 11. Painting. 12. Concrete bases. 13. Metal supports and anchorages. III 1.3 DEFINITIONS IU A. Exposed Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. B. Concealed Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. C. ABS: Acrylonitrile- butadiene- styrene plastic. D. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. E. PE: Polyethylene plastic. F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 11 11 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500 - 1 11 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1 1. Dielectric fittings. 2. Identification devices. B. Welding certificates. 1.5 Q UALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Steel Piping Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory- applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured -in -place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting if devices are applied to surfaces. C. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Formwork, reinforcement, and concrete requirements are specified in Division 03. 1 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500 - 2 1 MGA #053570 08/06 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe -Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 3 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8 -inch (3.2 -mm) maximum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125, cast -iron and cast - bronze flanges. b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250, cast -iron and steel flanges. 2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated; and 1 full -face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated. B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. C. Plastic, Pipe -Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 1 D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead -free alloys. Include water - flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper - phosphorus alloys for general -duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAgl, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated. 1 F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.121D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. 11 G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. 2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138. H. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer. 2.2 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. Transition Fittings, General: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined. B. Transition Couplings NPS 1 -1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: 1. Underground Piping: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting. 2. Aboveground Piping: Specified piping system fitting. 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500 - 3 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 C. AWWA Transition Couplings NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Lar ( ) g 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 1 offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Dresser, Inc.; DMD Div. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Div. d. JCM Industries. e. Smith- Blair, Inc. f. Viking Johnson. 3. Description: AWWA C219, metal sleeve -type coupling for underground pressure piping. 1 D. Plastic -to -Metal Transition Fittings: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Spears Manufacturing Co. 3. Description: PVC one -piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint or threaded end. E. Plastic -to -Metal Transition Unions: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Colonial Engineering, Inc. 1, b. NIBCO INC. c. Spears Manufacturing Co. 3. Description: MSS SP -107, PVC four -part union. Include brass or stainless -steel threaded end, solvent-cement-joint or threaded plastic end, rubber 0-ring, and union nut. F. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500 - 4 1 111 MGA #053570 08/06 11 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the m following: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Femco, Inc. c. Mission Rubber Company. d. Plastic Oddities. 1111 3. Description: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end. 2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Dielectric Fittings, General: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. 1 c. Epco Sales, Inc. d. Hart Industries, International, Inc. e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. It f. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 3. Description: Factory fabricated, union, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. J' a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C). b. End Connections: Solder joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded ferrous. C. Dielectric Flanges: 111 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Epco Sales, Inc. d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 11 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500 - 5 MGA #053570 08/06 3. Description: Factory- fabricated, bolted, companion -flange assembly, NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100) and larger. a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum. 11 b. End Connections: Solder joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder - joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. D. Dielectric -Flange Kits: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 1 offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 3. Description: Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges, NPS 2- 1/2 (DN 65) and larger. a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum. b. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. c. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. d. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers. E. Dielectric Couplings: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corporation. 3. Description: Galvanized -steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining, 11 NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller. a. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C). 1 b. End Connections: Threaded. F. Dielectric Nipples: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500 - 6 i 11 MGA #053570 08/06 Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products b 2. Manufacturers: � p q , p p Y one of the following: a. Perfection Corporation. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Victaulic Company. 3. Description: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining. a. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C). b. End Connections: Threaded or grooved. 1 2.4 SLEEVES n A. Mechanical sleeve seals for pipe penetrations are specified in Division 22 Section "Common u Work Results for Plumbing." B. Galvanized -Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239 -inch (0.6 -mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. C. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. D. Cast -Iron Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. 11 E. Molded PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. F. PVC Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. G. Molded PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing P P flange for attaching to wooden forms. 2.5 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A. General: Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 33 Sections. If more than single type is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option. 1 B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal permanently fastened to equipment with data engraved or stamped. 1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating 11� and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data. 2. Location: Accessible and visible. C. Stencils: Standard stencils prepared with letter sizes complying with recommendations in ASME A13.1. Minimum letter height is 1 -1/4 inches (30 mm) for ducts, and 3/4 inch (20 mm) for access door signs and similar operational instructions. 1. Material: Fiberboard. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500 - 7 11 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd-gloss black enamel, unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray -can form. 3. Identification Paint: Exterior, oil- based, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated. D. Snap -on Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semirigid, snap -on type. Include color - coding according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated. E. Pressure- Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, color- coded, pressure - sensitive -vinyl type with permanent adhesive. F. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (150 mm): Full -band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location. 1 G. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) and Larger: Either full -band or strip - type pipe markers, at least three times letter height and of length required for label. H. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard preprinted captions as selected by Architect. I. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. 1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions of flow, or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow. J. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color- coded, pressure- sensitive, self - adhesive vinyl tape, at least 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick. 1. Width: 1 -1/2 inches (40 mm) on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 6 inches (150 mm); 2 -1/2 inches (65 mm) for larger pipes. 2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated. K. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4 -inch (6.4 -mm) letters for piping system 1 abbreviation and 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) sequenced numbers. Include 5/32 -inch (4 -mm) hole for fastener. 1. Material: 0.032 -inch- (0.8 -mm -) thick, polished brass or aluminum. 2. Material: 0.0375 -inch- (1 -mm -) thick stainless steel. 3. Material: 3/32 -inch- (2.4 -mm -) thick plastic laminate with 2 black surfaces and a white inner layer. 4. Material: Valve manufacturer's standard solid plastic. 5. Size: 1 -1/2 inches (40 mm) in diameter, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Shape: As indicated for each piping system. 1 L. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire -link or beaded chain; or brass S- hooks. M. Engraved Plastic - Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper -base, phenolic- resin- laminate engraving stock; Grade ES -2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening. 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500 - 8 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 n vin : Engraver's standard letter le of sizes and with terms to match equipment ui 1. E gra g gr style, g p identification. 2. Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 3. Thickness: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), for units up to 20 sq. in. (130 sq. cm) or 8 inches (200 mm) in length, and 1/8 inch (3 mm) for larger units. 4. Fasteners: Self- tapping, stainless -steel screws or contact -type permanent adhesive. N. Plastic Equipment Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the following color codes: 1. Green: Cooling equipment and components. 2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components. 3. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components. 4. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet criteria above. 5. Hazardous Equipment: Use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1. 6. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Include the following: a. Name and plan number. b. Equipment service. c. Design capacity. d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, and speed. 7. Size: 2 -1/2 by 4 inches (65 by 100 mm) for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4 -1/2 by 6 inches (115 by 150 mm) for equipment. O. Plasticized Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident - prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with mat finish suitable for writing. 1. Size: 3 -1/4 by 5 -5/8 inches (83 by 143 mm). 2. Fasteners: Brass grommets and wire. 3. Nomenclature: Large -size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT OPERATE. P. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in piped utility identification with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, letters, and terms indicated for proper identification, operation, and maintenance of piped utility systems and equipment. 1. Multiple Systems: Identify individual system number and service if multiple systems of same name are indicated. 1 2.6 GROUT A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic- cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi (34.5 -MPa), 28 -day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. 3 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500 - 9 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2.7 FLOWABLE FILL A. Description: Low - strength- concrete, flowable -slurry mix. 1 1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, portland. 2. Density: 115- to 145- lb /cu. ft. (1840- to 2325 - kg/cu. m). 3. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, natural sand, fine and crushed gravel or stone, coarse. 4. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, natural sand, fine. 5. Admixture: ASTM C 618, fly -ash mineral. 6. Water: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M. 7. Strength: 100 to 200 psig (690 to 1380 kPa) at 28 days. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPED UTILITY DEMOLITION 1 A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" and Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures. 1 B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove piped utility systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. 1 1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. 2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping. Fill abandoned piping with flowable fill, and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. 3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational. 5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality. 3.2 DIELECTRIC FITTING APPLICATIONS , A. Dry Piping Systems: Connect piping of dissimilar metals with the following: 1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Dielectric unions. 2. NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300): Dielectric flanges or dielectric flange kits. B. Wet Piping Systems: Connect piping of dissimilar metals with the following: 1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Dielectric couplings or dielectric nipples. 2. NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Dielectric nipples. 3. NPS 2 -1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 65 to DN 200): Dielectric nipples or dielectric flange kits. 4. NPS 10 and NPS 12 (DN 250 and DN 300): Dielectric flange kits. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500 - 10 i 1 MGA #053570 08/06 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 33 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on the Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping to permit valve servicing. E. Install piping at indicated slopes. F. Install piping free of sags and bends. G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. 1 H. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. I. Sleeves are not required for core - drilled holes. J. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves. K. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of equipment areas or other wet areas 111 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. 2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 1 a. PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150). b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger, penetrating gypsum - board partitions. L. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in. 1 M. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing -in requirements. rn 3.4 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 33 Sections specifying piping systems. 3 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500 - 11 11 1 MGA #053570 08/06 B. Ream ends of i es and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel e. lain ends of steel i PP P PP C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before 1 assembly. D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal '- threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. 1 E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. 1 F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. G. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved -end pipe coupling with coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions. H. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813 water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead -free solder alloy (0.20 percent maximum lead content) complying with ASTM B 32. 1 I. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper - phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. Pressure-Sealed ints: Assemble joints for plain-end copper tube and mechanical pressure seal J. Jo J p pp p fitting with proprietary crimping tool to according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions. K. Plastic Piping Solvent Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe - handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 appendixes. 3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other -than- schedule - number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. 5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix. 1 L. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139. M. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212. 1 11 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500 - 12 1 1 11 MGA #053570 08/06 N. Plastic Piping Heat - Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. 1. Plain -End PE Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain -End PE Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion. O. Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 PIPING CONNECTIONS 11 A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2 -1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3. Install dielectric fittings at connections of dissimilar metal pipes. 3.6 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Install equipment level and plumb, unless otherwise indicated. B. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location. 1 C. Install equipment to allow right of way to piping systems installed at required slope. 3.7 PAINTING A. Painting of piped utility systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 11 painting Sections. B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory- painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 3.8 IDENTIFICATION A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow. 1. Stenciled Markers: According to ASME A13.1. 2. Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for hot noninsulated piping. 3. Locate pipe markers on exposed piping according to the following: a. Near each valve and control device. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500 - 13 1 11 MGA #053570 08/06 b. Near each branch, excludin g equipment short takeoffs for a ui ment and terminal units. Mark each pipe at branch if flow pattern is not obvious. c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors or enter inaccessible enclosures. d. At manholes and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic - laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major item of equipment. 1. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) high for name of unit if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (610 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) high for distances up to 72 inches (1800 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering two- thirds to three- fourths of size of principal lettering. 2. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish among multiple units, inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations. C. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices that become visually blocked by work of this or other Divisions. 3.9 CONCRETE BASES A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. 1 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18 -inch (450 -mm) centers around the full perimeter of base. 3. Install epoxy- coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 111 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000 -psi (20.7 -MPa), 28 -day compressive - strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete and Miscellaneous Cast -in- Place Concrete" 3.10 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor piped utility materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 11 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500 - 14 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 3.11 GROUTING A. Mix and install grout for equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout. END OF SECTION 330500 1 1 1 1 11 11 1 1 11 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 330500 - 15 1 mmitm miaow animimem womem mom .1 MGA #053570 08/06 11 SECTION 334100 - STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 11 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes gravity-flow, nonpressure and force -main, pressure storm drainage outside the building, with the following components: 1. Special fittings for expansion and deflection. 2. Backwater valves. 3. Cleanouts. 4. Drains. 5. Corrosion- protection piping encasement. 6. Precast concrete; Cast -in -place concrete; Fiberglass manholes. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ABS: Acrylonitrile- butadiene- styrene plastic. B. EPDM: Ethylene- propylene - diene- monomer rubber. 1 C. FRP: Fiberglass - reinforced plastic. D. LLDPE: Linear low- density, polyethylene plastic. E. PE: Polyethylene plastic. F. PP: Polypropylene plastic. G. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. H. RTRF: Glass - fiber - reinforced, thermosetting -resin fitting. I. RTRP: Glass- fiber - reinforced, thermosetting -resin pipe. 11 J. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer. 11 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 1 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 CE REQUIREMENTS PERFORMAN UIREMENTS Q A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure, Drainage - Piping Pressure Rating: 10 -foot head of water (30 kPa). 1 Pipe joints shall be at least silttight, unless otherwise indicated. B. Force -Main, Pressure - Piping Pressure Rating: At least equal to system operating pressure but not less than 150 prig (1035 kPa). 1.5 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Special pipe fittings. 2. Backwater valves. 3. Drains. 4. Channel drainage systems. 5. Storage and leaching chambers. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1 1. Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames and covers. Include design calculations, and concrete design -mix report for cast -in -place manholes. 1 2. Catch Basins; Catch Basins and Stormwater Inlets; Stormwater Inlets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames, covers, and grates. 3. Stormwater Detention Structures: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames and covers, design calculations, and concrete design -mix report. C. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in same trench and clearances from storm drainage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate structures. D. Profile Drawings: Show system piping in elevation. Draw profiles at horizontal scale of not 1 less than 1 inch equals 50 feet (1:500) and vertical scale of not less than 1 inch equals 5 feet (1:50). Indicate manholes and piping. Show types, sizes, materials, and elevations of other utilities crossing system piping. 1 E. Field quality- control test reports. 1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight. 1 B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage. C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions. D. Handle catch basins; catch basins and stormwater inlets; stormwater inlets according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions. 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 2 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 13 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Storm Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect and Owner no fewer than two (2) days in advance of proposed interruption of service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Architect's and Owner's written permission. 1 PART 2- PRODUCTS 1 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 1 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials. 2.3 HUB -AND- SPIGOT, CAST -IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class; Service and Extra -Heavy classes; Extra -Heavy class. B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. C. Calkin g Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber. 2.4 HUBLESS CAST -IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS 1 A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. B. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion - resistant 1 fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. C. Shielded, Stainless -Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with ASTM A 666, Type 301, stainless -steel corrugated shield; stainless -steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 3 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1. Available Manufacturers: a. ANACO. b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. c. Fernco Inc. d. Ideal Div.; Stant Corp. e. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. f. Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div. 2. Couplings for NPS 1 -1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): 2 -1/8 -inch- (54 -mm -) wide 1 shield with 2 bands. 3. Couplings for NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 3 -inch- (76 -mm -) wide shield with 4 bands. 4. Couplings for NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250): 4 -inch- (102 -mm -) wide shield with 4 bands. D. Heavy -Duty, Shielded, Stainless -Steel Couplings, NPS 10 (DN 250) and Smaller: With ASTM A 666, Type 301 or Type 304, stainless -steel shield; 2 or more stainless -steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. ANACO. 1 b. Clamp -All Corp. c. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. d. Ideal Div.; Stant Corp. e. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. f. Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div. 2. Couplings for NPS 1 -1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): 3 inches (76 mm). 1 3. Couplings for NPS 5 to NPS 10 (DN 125 to DN 250): 4 inches (102 mm). E. Heavy -Duty, Shielded, Stainless -Steel Couplings, NPS 12 and NPS 15 (DN 300 and DN 375): 1 With ASTM A 666, Type 301 or Type 304, stainless -steel shield; stainless -steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. ANACO. b. Ideal Div.; Stant Corp. c. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div. 2. Couplings: 5 -1/2 -inch- (140 -mm -) wide shield with 6 bands. F. Heavy -Duty, Cast -Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48, two- piece, cast -iron housing; stainless -steel bolts and nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. MG Piping Products Co. 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 4 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 NPS 1 -1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): 2 -1/8 -inch- 54 -mm- 2. Couplings for ( ) ( ) wide housing with 2 bolts. 3. Couplings for NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 3 -1/8 -inch- (80 -mm -) wide housing with 4 bolts. 4. Couplings for NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250): 4 -inch- (102 -mm -) wide housing with 4 bolts. G. Unshielded Couplings: ASTM C 1461, rigid, sleeve -type, reducing- or transition -type mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion - resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. ANACO. 1 2. Couplings for NPS 1 -1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): Sleeve with two bands. 2.5 DUCTILE -IRON CULVERT PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: ASTM A 716, for push -on joints. B. Standard Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron, for push -on joints. C. Compact Fittings: AWWA C153, for push -on joints. i D. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. 1 2.6 DUCTILE -IRON PRESSURE PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: AWWA C151, for push -on joints. B. Standard Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron, for push -on joints. C. Compact Fittings: AWWA C153, for push -on joints. D. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. 2.7 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Corrugated -Steel Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 760/A 760M, Type I with fittings of similar form and construction as pipe. ' 1. Special -Joint Bands: Corrugated steel with 0-ring seals. 2. Standard -Joint Bands: Corrugated steel. 3. Coating: Aluminum. 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 5 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2.8 ALUMINUM PIPE AND FITTINGS 111 A. Corrugated Aluminum Pipe and Fittings: ASTM B 745/B 745M, Type I with fittings of similar form and construction as pipe. 1. Special -Joint Bands: Corrugated steel with 0-ring seals. 2. Standard -Joint Bands: Corrugated steel. 2.9 ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS r A. ABS Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2751, with bell -and- spigot ends for gasketed joints. 1. NPS 3 to NPS 6 (DN 80 to DN 150): SDR 35. 2. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): SDR 42. 3. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 2.10 PE PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Corrugated PE Drainage Pipe and Fittings NPS 10 (DN 250) and Smaller: AASHTO M 252M, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints. 1. Silttight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket material that mates with tube and fittings. 2. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 252M, corrugated, matching tube and fittings. 3. Corrugated PE Pipe and Fittings NPS 12 to NPS 48 (DN 250 to DN 1200): AASHTO M 294M, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints. 4. Silttight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket material that mates with pipe and fittings. 5. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 294M, corrugated, matching pipe and fittings. B. Corrugated PE Pipe and Fittings NPS 56 and NPS 60 (DN 1400 and DN 1524): 1 AASHTO MP7, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints. 1. Silttight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket material that mates with pipe and fittings. 2. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO MP7, corrugated, matching pipe and fittings. 2.11 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PVC Pressure Pipe: AWWA C900, Class 150, for gasketed joints and using ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 1. Fittings NPS 4 to NPS 8 (DN 100 to DN 200): PVC pressure fittings complying with AWWA C907, for gasketed joints and using ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 2. Fittings NPS 10 (DN 250) and Larger: Ductile -iron, compact fittings complying with AWWA C153, for push -on joints and using AWWA C111, rubber gaskets. B. PVC Water- Service Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 80 pipe, with plain ends for solvent- cemented joints with ASTM D 2467, Schedule 80, socket -type fittings. STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 6 11 MGA #053570 08/06 - Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 891, Sewer and Drain Series PS 50 minimum C. PVC Cellular Cor e p g , stiffness pipe with ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, socket -type fittings for solvent- cemented joints. D. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 (DN 375) and Smaller: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, with bell- and - spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. i E. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 18 (DN 450) and Larger: ASTM F 679, T -2 wall thickness, with bell -and- spigot ends for gasketed joints with ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 1 F. PVC Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 794 pipe, with bell- and - spigot ends; ASTM D 3034 fittings, with bell ends; and ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 2.12 FIBERGLASS PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Fiberglass Sewer Pipe: ASTM D 3262, RTRP for gasketed joints fabricated with Type 2, polyester or Type 4, epoxy resin. 1. Liner: 1, reinforced thermoset. 2. Grade: Reinforced, surface layer matching pipe resin. 3. Stiffness: D, 72 psig (496 kPa). 1 B. Fiberglass Nonpressure Fittings: ASTM D 3840, RTRF for gasketed joints. 1. Laminating Resin: Type 1, polyester or Type 2, epoxy resin. 1 2. Reinforcement: Grade with finish compatible with resin. C. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 2.13 CONCRETE PIPE AND FITTINGS 1 A. Nonreinforced- Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 14 (ASTM C 14M), Class 3, with bell- and - spigot or groove and tongue ends and gasketed joints with ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber gaskets sealant joints with ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen 1 or butyl- rubber sealant. B. Reinforced- Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76 (ASTM C 76M), with bell-and- spigot or groove and tongue ends and gasketed joints with ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber gaskets sealant joints with ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl- rubber sealant. I 1. Class I, Wall A and B. 2. Class II, Wall A and B and C. 3. Class III, Wall A and B and C. 4. Class IV, Wall A and B and C. 5. Class V, Wall B and C. 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 7 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2.14 NONPRESSURE -TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve -type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and corrosion- resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. B. Sleeve Materials: 1 1. For Concrete Pipes: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. 2. For Cast -Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 3. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 4. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined. 1 C. Unshielded Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric sleeve with stainless -steel shear ring and corrosion - resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. 1 b. Femco Inc. c. Logan Clay Products Company (The). d. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. e. NDS Inc. f. Plastic Oddities, Inc. D. Shielded Flexible Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full - length, corrosion- resistant outer shield and corrosion- resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. 1 b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. c. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. E. Ring -Type Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring. 1. Available Manufacturers: 1 a. Femco Inc. b. Logan Clay Products Company (The). c. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. F. Nonpressure -Type Rigid Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve -type reducing- or transition -type mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion- resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Available Manufacturers: 111 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 8 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 a. ANACO. 2.15 PRESSURE -TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS ' A. Reducing or transition, metal, bolted, sleeve -type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground pressure piping. Include 150 -psig (1035 -kPa) minimum pressure rating and ends of same sizes as piping to be joined. B. Tubular- Sleeve Couplings: AWWA C219, with center sleeve, gaskets, end rings, and bolt fasteners. 1 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. b. Dresser, Inc.; DMD Div. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Div. d. JCM Industries. e. Romac Industries, Inc. f. Smith - Blair, Inc. g. Viking Johnson. 2. Center - Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber. 4. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion- resistant coating or material. C. Split - Sleeve Couplings: With split sleeve with sealing pad and closure plates, 0-ring gaskets, and bolt fasteners. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Brico Industries. 2. Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Sleeve Dimensions: Of thickness and width required to provide pressure rating. ' 4. Gasket Material: 0-rings made of EPDM rubber, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion - resistant coating or material. 2.16 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS A. Ductile -Iron Flexible Expansion Joints: Compound fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include 2 gasketed ball joint sections and 1 or more gasketed sleeve sections, rated for 250 -psig (1725 -kPa) minimum working pressure and for offset and expansion indicated. 1. Available Manufacturers: ' a. EBAA lion Sales, Inc. b. Romac Industries, Inc. c. Star Pipe Products. STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 9 1 MGA #053570 08/06 B. Ductile -Iron Deflection Fittings: Compound coupling fitting with ball joint, flexing section • g P P g g J � g gaskets, and restrained joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include rating for 250 -psig (1725 -kPa) minimum working pressure and for up to 15 degrees of deflection. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc. C. Ductile -Iron Expansion Joints: Three -piece assembly of telescoping sleeve with gaskets and restrained -type, ductile -iron or steel with protective coating, bell- and - spigot end sections complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include rating for 250 -psig (1725 -kPa) minimum working pressure and for expansion indicated. 1 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Dresser, Inc.; DMD Div. b. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc. c. JCM Industries. d. Smith- Blair, Inc. 1 2.17 BACKWATER VALVES 1 A. Gray -Iron Backwater Valves: ASME A112.14.1, gray -iron body and bolted cover, with bronze seat. 1 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Josam Company. 1 b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. c. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. d. Watts Industries, Inc. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Enpoco, Inc. Div. f. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Zuni Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Horizontal Type: With swing check valve and hub - and - spigot ends. 111 3. Combination Horizontal and Manual Gate -Valve Type: With swing check valve, integral gate valve, and hub -and- spigot ends. 4. Terminal Type: With bronze seat, swing check valve, and hub inlet. B. PVC Backwater Valves: Horizontal type; with PVC body, PVC removable cover, and PVC 1 swing check valve. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Canplas Inc. b. IPS Corporation. c. NDS Inc. d. Plastic Oddities, Inc. e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 10 1 MGA #053570 08/06 Light Commercial Specialty Plumbing Zurn Industries, Inc.; Zurn gh p ty g Products. 2.18 CLEANOUTS • ' A. Gray -Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray -iron housing with clamping device and round, secured, scoriated, gray -iron cover. Include gray -iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot connection and countersunk, tapered- thread, brass closure plug. 1 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB Manufacturing, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. d. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. 1 e. Watts Industries, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Enpoco, Inc. Div. g. Zum Industries, Inc.; Zurn Specification Drainage Operation. 1 2. Top - Loading Classification(s): Light; Medium; Heavy and Extra -heavy duty. 3. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings. B. PVC Cleanouts: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and riser to cleanout of same material as sewer piping. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Canplas Inc. b. IPS Corporation. c. NDS Inc. ' d. Plastic Oddities, Inc. e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. f. Zurn Industries, Inc. Zurn Light Commercial Specialty Plumbing Products. 2.19 DRAINS A. Gray -Iron Area Drains: ASME A 112.21.1 M, round body with anchor flange and round secured grate. Include bottom outlet with inside calk or spigot connection, of sizes indicated. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB Manufacturing, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. d. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. e. Watts Industries, Inc. 1 f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Enpoco, Inc. Div. g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Zurn Specification Drainage Operation. STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 11 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2. Top-Loading Classification(s): Medium; Medium and heavy; and Heavy du P g (s ) "Y, �'Y h. ' B. Gray -Iron Trench Drains: ASME A112.21.1M, 6 -inch- (150 -mm -) wide top surface, rectangular body with anchor flange or other anchoring device, and rectangular secured grate. Include units of total length indicated and number of bottom outlets with inside calk or spigot connections, of sizes indicated. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Josam Company. 1 b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. c. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. d. Watts Industries, Inc. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Enpoco, Inc. Div. f. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Zurn Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Top - Loading Classification(s): Medium; Heavy; Extra - heavy; Medium and heavy duty. 111 C. Steel Trench Drains: Factory fabricated from ASTM A 242/A 242M, welded steel plate to form 111 rectangular body with uniform bottom slope of 2 percent down toward outlet, anchor flange, and grate. Include units of total length indicated, bottom outlet of size indicated, outlet strainer, acid - resistant enamel coating on inside and outside surfaces, and grate with openings of total free area at least two times cross - sectional area of outlet. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Rockford Sanitary Systems, Inc. 2. Plate Thickness(es): 1/8 inch (3.2 mm); 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and 1/4 inch (6.4 mm); 1/4 111 inch (6.4 mm). 3. Overall Width(s): 7-1/2 inches (190 mm); 7-1/2 inches (190 mm) and 12-1/3 inches (313 mm); 12 -1/3 inches (313 mm). a. Grate Openings: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) circular; 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) circular; 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) circular or 3/8 -by -3 -inch (9.5- by- 76 -mm) slots; 3/8 -by -3 -inch (9.5 -by- 76-mm) slots — per City of Tigard standards. 1 2.20 CORROSION- PROTECTION PIPING ENCASEMENT A. Encasement for Underground Metal Piping: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. 1. Form: Sheet or tube. 2. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008 -inch (0.20 -mm) minimum thickness. 3. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008 -inch (0.20 -mm) minimum thickness or high - density, crosslaminated PE film of 0.004 -inch (0.10 -mm) minimum thickness. 4. Material: High - density, crosslaminated PE film of 0.004 -inch (0.10 -mm) minimum thickness. 5. Color: Black. 1 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 12 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2.21 MANHOLES 1 A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints. ' 1. Diameter: 48 inches (1200 mm) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, as required to prevent flotation. 3. Base Section: 6 -inch (150 -mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 4 -inch (102-min) minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor. 4. Riser Sections: 4 -inch (102 -mm) minimum thickness, and lengths to provide depth indicated. 5. Top Section: Eccentric -cone type unless concentric -cone or flat - slab -top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. ' 6. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber. 7. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe connection. ' 8. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder; Individual FRP steps, FRP ladder, or ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP; [ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16 -inch (300- to 400 -mm) intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60 inches (1500 mm). ' 9. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer. 10. Grade Rings: Reinforced - concrete rings, 6- to 9 -inch (150- to 225 -mm) total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover. 11. Protective Coating: Plant- applied, SSPC -Paint 16, coal -tar, epoxy - polyamide paint; 10- mil (0.26 -mm) minimum thickness applied to exterior and interior surfaces. ' 12. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24 -inch (610 -mm) ID by 7- to 9 -inch (175- to 225 -mm) riser with 4 -inch- (102 -mm -) minimum width flange and 26 -inch- (660 -mm -) diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "STORM SEWER." a. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60 -40 -18 ductile iron, unless otherwise indicated. b. Protective Coating: Foundry- applied, SSPC -Paint 16, coal -tar, epoxy - polyamide paint; 10 -mil (0.26 -mm) minimum thickness applied to all surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. B. Designed Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 913; designed according to ASTM C 890 for A -16 (ASSHTO HS20 -44), heavy - traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, and dimensions indicated, with provision for sealant joints. 1 1. Ballast: Increase thickness of one or more precast concrete sections or add concrete to manhole, as required to prevent flotation. 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber. 1 3. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe connection. 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 13 1 MGA #053570 08/06 Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder; Individual FRP steps, FRP ladder, or ' 4. Steps: Indivi p p , , ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP; ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16 -inch (300- to 400 -mm) intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60 inches (1500 mm). 5. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer. 6. Grade Rings: Reinforced - concrete rings, 6- to 9 -inch (150- to 225 -mm) total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover. 7. Protective Coating: Plant- applied, SSPC -Paint 16, coal -tar, epoxy - polyamide paintl0- mil (0.26 -mm) minimum thickness applied to exterior and interior surfaces. 8. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24 -inch (610 -mm) ID by 7- to 9 -inch (175- to 225 -mm) riser with 4 -inch- (102 -mm -) minimum width flange and 26 -inch- (660 -mm -) diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording 1 equivalent to "STORM SEWER." a. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60 -40 -18 ductile iron, unless otherwise indicated. b. Protective Coating: Foundry- applied, SSPC -Paint 16, coal -tar, epoxy - polyamide paint; 10 -mil (0.26 -mm) minimum thickness applied to all surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Cast -in -Place Concrete Manholes: Construct of reinforced- concrete bottom, walls, and top; designed according to ASTM C 890 for A -16 (ASSHTO HS20 -44), heavy - traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, dimensions, and appurtenances indicated. 1 1. Ballast: Increase thickness of concrete, as required to prevent flotation. 2. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe connection. 3. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder; Individual FRP steps, FRP ladder, or ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP; ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16 -inch (300- to 400 -mm) intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60 inches (1500 mm). 4. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer. 5. Grade Rings: Reinforced - concrete rings, 6- to 9 -inch (150- to 225 -mm) total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover. 6. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24 -inch (610 -mm) ID by 7- to 9 -inch (175- to 225 -mm) riser with 4 -inch- (102 -mm -) minimum width flange and 26 -inch- (660 -mm -) diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "STORM SEWER." a. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60 -40 -18 ductile iron, unless otherwise indicated. b. Protective Coating: Foundry- applied, SSPC -Paint 16, coal -tar, epoxy - polyamide paint; 10 -mil (0.26 -mm) minimum thickness applied to all surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 14 1 • 1 MGA #053570 08/06 D. Fiberglass Manholes: ASTM D 3753, fabricated, FRP. 1 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Associated Fiberglass Enterprises. b. Containment Solutions, Inc. c. L.F. Manufacturing, Inc. 2. Diameter: 48 inches (1200 mm) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Ballast: Increase thickness of concrete base, as required to prevent flotation. 4. Base Section: Concrete, 6 -inch (150 -mm) minimum thickness. 5. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), cast or fitted into manhole ' walls, for each pipe connection. 6. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on one step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps 1 into sidewalls at 12- to 16 -inch (300- to 400 -mm) intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60 inches (1500 mm). 7. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer. 8. Grade Rings: Reinforced - concrete rings, 6- to 9 -inch (150- to 225 -mm) total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover. 9. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24 -inch (610 -mm) ID by 7- to 9 -inch (175- to 225 -mm) riser with 4 -inch- (102 -mm -) minimum width flange and 26 -inch- (660 -mm -) diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "STORM SEWER." a. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60 -40 -18 ductile iron, unless otherwise indicated. b. Protective Coating: Foundry- applied, SSPC -Paint 16, coal -tar, epoxy - polyamide paint; 10 -mil (0.26 -mm) minimum thickness applied to all surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 1 2.22 CONCRETE A. General: Cast -in -place concrete according to ACI 318/318R, ACI 350R, and the following: 1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable. ' B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum water - cementitious materials ratio. 1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 1 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa), deformed steel. C. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) minimum, with 1 0.58 maximum water - cementitious materials ratio. 1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 15 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa), deformed steel. 2.23 POLYMER - CONCRETE, CHANNEL DRAINAGE SYSTEMS A. Description, General: Modular system of precast, polymer- concrete channel sections, grates, and appurtenances; designed so grates fit into channel recesses without rocking or rattling. Include number of units required to form total lengths indicated. B. Available Manufacturers: 1 1. ABT, Inc. 2. ACO Polymer Products, Inc. 3. Innovative Plastics Products. Inc. 4. Mea -Josam Div.; Josam Company. 5. Strongwell; Lenoir City Div. C. Sloped - Invert, Polymer- Concrete Systems: Include the following components: 1. Channel Sections: Interlocking joint, precast, modular units with end caps. Include 4- 1 inch (102 -mm) inside width and deep, rounded bottom, with built -in invert slope of 0.6 percent and with outlets in number, sizes, and locations indicated. Include extension sections necessary for required depth. 1 a. Frame: Include gray -iron or steel frame for grate. 2. Grates with manufacturer's designation "Heavy Duty," with slots or perforations that fit 1 recesses in channels. a. Material: Galvanized steel. 1 3. Covers: Solid gray iron, if indicated. 4. Locking Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard device for securing grates to channel sections. D. Narrow -Width, Level- Invert, Polymer- Concrete Systems: Include the following components: 1. Channel Sections: Interlocking joint, precast, modular units with end caps. Include 5- inch (127 -min) inside width and 9 -3/4 -inch- (248 -mm -) deep, rounded bottom, with level invert and with NPS 4 (DN 100) outlets in number and locations indicated. 2. Grates with slots or perforations that fit recesses in channels. a. Material: Galvanized steel. 1 3. Covers: Solid gray iron, if indicated. 4. Locking Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard device for securing grates to channel sections. E. Wide -Width, Level- Invert, Polymer- Concrete Systems: Include the following components: 1111 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 16 1 MGA #053570 08/06 Interlocking-joint, precast, modular units with end caps. Include 8- 1. Channel Sections: g J , p p inch (203 -mm) inside width and 13 -3/4 -inch- (350 -mm -) deep, rounded bottom, with level invert and with outlets in number, sizes, and locations indicated. 2. Grates with slots or other openings that fit recesses in channels. • 1 a. Material: Gray iron. 3. Covers: Solid gray iron, if indicated. 4. Locking Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard device for securing grates to channel sections. ' F. Drainage Specialties: Precast, polymer- concrete units. 1. Large Catch Basins: 24-by-12-inch (610-by-305-mm) polymer- concrete body, with outlets in number and sizes indicated. Include gray -iron slotted grate. a. Frame: Include gray -iron or steel frame for grate. 2. Small Catch Basins: 19- to 24 -inch by approximately 6 -inch (483- to 610 -mm by approximately 150 -mm) polymer- concrete body, with outlets in number and sizes indicated. Include gray -iron slotted grate. 1 a. Frame: Include gray -iron or steel frame for grate. 3. Oil Interceptors: Polymer- concrete body with interior baffle and 4 steel support channels 1 and two 1/4 -inch- (6.4 -mm -) thick, steel -plate covers. a. Capacity: 260 gal. (984 L) or per plans and architectural approval. b. Inlet and Outlet: NPS 4 (DN 100). 4. Sediment Interceptors: 27 -inch- (686 -mm -) square, polymer- concrete body, with outlets 1 in number and sizes indicated. Include 24 -inch- (610 -mm -) square, gray -iron frame and slotted grate. G. Supports, Anchors, and Setting Devices: Manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise indicated. H. Channel- Section Joining and Fastening Materials: As recommended by system manufacturer. 1 2.24 PLASTIC, CHANNEL DRAINAGE SYSTEMS A. Description, General: Modular system of plastic channel sections, grates, and appurtenances; ' designed so grates fit into frames without rocking or rattling. Include number of units required to form total lengths indicated. B. Available Manufacturers: 1. ACO Polymer Prod. 2. MultiDrain Corp. 3. NDS Inc. 4. Tuf -Tite, Inc. 5. Zuni Industries, Inc.; Zum Light Commercial Specialty Plumbing Products. STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 17 1 MGA #053570 08/06 Fiberglass Systems: Include the following components: C. g Y g onents: P 1. Channel Sections: Interlocking joint, fiberglass modular units, with built -in invert slope of approximately 1 percent and with end caps. Include rounded or inclined inside bottom surface, with outlets in number, sizes, and locations indicated. a. Width: 6 or 8 inches (150 or 203 min). 1 2. Factory- or field- attached frames that fit channel sections and grates. a. Material: Manufacturer's standard metal. 3. Grates with slots or perforations that fit frames. 1 a. Material: Galvanized steel or Gray iron or Stainless steel or per architectural approval. 1 4. Covers: Solid gray iron, if indicated. 5. Drainage Specialties: Include the following plastic components: a. Large Catch Basins: 24 -inch- (610 -mm -) square plastic body, with outlets in number and sizes indicated. Include gray -iron frame and slotted grate. b. Small Catch Basins: 12 -by -24 -inch (305 -by- 610 -mm) plastic body, with outlets in number and sizes indicated. Include gray -iron frame and slotted grate. c. Lynch Style Catch Basins: On _ private system only refer to manufactures standards. 1 D. PE Systems: Include the following components: 1. Channel Sections: Interlocking joint, PE modular units, 4 inches (102 mm) wide, with 1 end caps. Include rounded bottom, with level invert and with outlets in number, sizes, and locations indicated. 1 2. Grates: PE, ladder shaped; with stainless -steel screws. 3. Color: Gray, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Drainage Specialties: Include the following PE components: a. Drams: 4 -inch- (102 -mm -) diameter, round, slotted top; with NPS 4 (DN 100) bottom outlet. b. Drains: 8 -inch- (203 -mm -) diameter, round, slotted top; with NPS 6 (DN 150) bottom outlet. c. Drains: 4 -inch- (102 -mm -) square, slotted top; with NPS 3 (DN 80) bottom outlet. d. Drains: 8 -inch- (203 -mm -) square, slotted top; with NPS 6 (DN 150) bottom outlet. e. Catch Basins: 12 -inch- (305 -mm -) square plastic body, with outlets m number and sizes indicated. Include PE slotted grate 11 -3/4 inches (298 mm) square by 1 -1/8 inches (28.6 mm) thick. 1 E. Supports, Anchors, and Setting Devices: Manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise indicated. F. Channel- Section Joining and Fastening Materials: As recommended by system manufacturer. 1 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 18 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 2.25 CATCH BASINS 1 A. Standard Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints. ' 1. Base Section: 6 -inch (150 -mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 4 -inch (102 -mm) minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor. 2. Riser Sections: 4 -inch (102 -mm) minimum thickness, 48 -inch (1220 -mm) diameter, and lengths to provide depth indicated. 3. Top Section: Eccentric -cone type unless concentric -cone or flat - slab -top type is ' indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. 4. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber. 5. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and shape matching catch basin frame and grate. Include sealant recommended by ring ' manufacturer. 6. Grade Rings: Include 2 or 3 reinforced - concrete rings, of 6- to 9 -inch (150- to 229 -mm) total thickness, that match 24 -inch- (610 -mm -) diameter frame and grate. 7. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder; Individual FRP steps, FRP ladder, or ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP; ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16 -inch (300- to 400 -mm) intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of catch basin to finished grade is less than 60 inches (1500 mm). ' 8. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section. ' B. Designed Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 913, precast, reinforced concrete; designed according to ASTM C 890 for A -16 (ASSHTO HS20 -44), heavy - traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, and dimensions indicated, with provision for sealant joints. 1 1. Joint Sealants: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber. 2. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and shape matching catch basin frame and grate. Include sealant recommended by ring ' manufacturer. 3. Grade Rings: Include 2 or 3 reinforced - concrete rings, of 6- to 9 -inch (150- to 229 -mm) total thickness, that match 24 -inch- (610 -mm -) diameter frame and grate. ' 4. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder; Individual FRP steps, FRP ladder, or ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP; ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16 -inch (300- to 400 -mm) intervals. Omit steps if total ' depth from floor of catch basin to finished grade is less than 60 inches (1500 mm). 5. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section. 1 C. Cast -in -Place Concrete, Catch Basins: Construct of reinforced concrete; designed according to ASTM C 890 for structural loading; of depth, shape, dimensions, and appurtenances indicated. 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 19 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1. Bottom, Walls and Top: Reinforced concrete. 2. Channels and Benches: Concrete. 3. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder; Individual FRP steps, FRP ladder, or ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP; ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16 -inch (300- to 400 -mm) intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of catch basin to finished grade is less than 60 inches (1500 mm). D. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60- 40 -18, ductile iron designed for A -16, structural loading. Include flat grate with small square or short- slotted drainage openings. 1. Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent, unless otherwise indicated. E. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60- 40 -18, ductile iron designed for A -16, structural loading. Include 24 -inch (610 -mm) ID by 7- to 9 -inch (178- to 229 -mm) riser with 4 -inch (102 - mm) minimum width flange, and 26 -inch- (660 -mm -) diameter flat grate with small square or short- slotted drainage openings. 1. Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent, unless otherwise indicated. 2.26 STORMWATER INLETS A. Curb Inlets: Made with vertical curb opening, of materials and dimensions according to utility 1 standards. B. Gutter Inlets: Made with horizontal gutter opening, of materials and dimensions according to 1 utility standards. Include heavy -duty frames and grates. C. Combination Inlets: Made with vertical curb and horizontal gutter openings, of materials and 1 dimensions according to utility standards. Include heavy -duty frames and grates. D. Frames and Grates: Heavy -duty frames and grates according to utility standards. 1 E. Curb Inlets: Vertical curb opening, of materials and dimensions indicated. F. Gutter Inlets: Horizontal gutter opening, of materials and dimensions indicated. Include heavy- 1 duty frames and grates. G. Combination Inlets: Vertical curb and horizontal gutter openings, of materials and dimensions 1 indicated. Include heavy -duty frames and grates. H. Frames and Grates: Dimensions, opening pattern, free area, and other attributes indicated. 1 1 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 20 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 ' 2.27 STORMWATER DETENTIONSTRUCTURES 1 A. Cast -in -Place Concrete, Stonnwater Detention Structures: Construct of reinforced- concrete bottom, walls, and top; designed according to ASTM C 890 for A -16 (ASSHTO HS20 -44), heavy - traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, dimensions, and appurtenances indicated. 1. Ballast: Increase thickness of concrete, as required to prevent flotation. 2. Grade Rings: Include 2 or 3 reinforced - concrete rings, of 6- to 9 -inch (150- to 229 -mm) ' total thickness, that match 24 -inch- (610 -mm -) diameter frame and cover. 3. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder; Individual FRP steps, FRP ladder, or ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) steel reinforcing rods encased in ' ASTM D 4101, PP; ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2 -inch (13 -min) steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16 -inch (300- to 400 -mm) intervals. Omit steps if total 1 depth from floor of structure to finished grade is less than 60 inches (1500 mm). B. Manhole Frames and Covers: ASTM A 536, Grade 60- 40 -18, ductile -iron castings designed for ' heavy -duty service. Include 24 -inch (610 -mm) ID by 7- to 9 -inch (178- to 229 -mm) riser with 4 -inch (102 -mm) minimum width flange, and 26 -inch- (660 -mm -) diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering "STORM SEWER" cast into cover. 2.28 PIPE OUTLETS 1 A. Head Walls: Cast -in -place reinforced concrete, with apron and tapered sides. B. Riprap Basins: Broken, irregular size and shape, graded stone according to NSSGA's "Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment Control." 1. Average Size: NSSGA No. R -3, screen opening 2 inches (51 mm). 2. Average Size: NSSGA No. R-4, screen opening 3 inches (76 mm). 3. Average Size: NSSGA No. R -5, screen opening 5 inches (127 mm). C. Filter Stone: According to NSSGA's "Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment Control," 1 No. FS -2, No. 4 screen opening, average -size, graded stone. D. Energy Dissipaters: According to NSSGA's "Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment 1 Control," No. A -1, 3 -ton (2700 -kg) average weight armor stone, unless otherwise indicated. 2.29 DRY WELLS A. Description: ASTM C 913, precast, reinforced, perforated concrete rings. Include the following: 1. Floor: Cast -in -place concrete. 2. Cover: Liftoff -type concrete cover with cast -in lift rings. ' 3. Wall Thickness: 4 inches (102 mm) minimum with 1 -inch (25 -mm) diameter or 1 -by -3- inch- (25- by- 76 -mm -) maximum slotted perforations arranged in rows parallel to axis of ring. 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 21 1 MGA #053570 08/06 a. Total Free Area of Perforations: Approximately 15 percent of ring interior surface. PP Y P g b. Ring Construction: Designed to be self - aligning. 4. Filtering Material: ASTM D 448, Size No. 24, 3/4- to 2 -1/2 -inch (19- to 63 -mm) washed, crushed stone or gravel. B. Description: Manufactured PE side panels and top cover that assemble into 50 -gal. (190 -L) 1 storage capacity units. 1. Available Manufacturers: 1 a. Flo -Well Products, Ltd. 2. Side Panels: With knockout ports for piping and seepage holes. 1 3. Top Cover: With knockout port for drain. 4. Filter Fabric: As recommended by unit manufacturer. 5. Filtering Material: ASTM D 448, Size No. 24, 3/4- to 2 -1/2 -inch (19- to 63 -mm) washed, crushed stone or gravel. C. Description: Constructed -in -place aggregate type. Include the following: 1 1. Lining: Clay or concrete bricks. 2. Lining: Concrete blocks or precast concrete rings with notches or weep holes. 3. Filtering Material: ASTM D 448, Size No. 24, 3/4- to 2 -1/2 -inch (19- to 63 -mm) washed, crushed stone or gravel. 4. Cover: Precast, reinforced- concrete slab, designed for structural loading according to ASTM C 890 and made according to ASTM C 913. Include slab dimensions that will extend 12 inches (300 mm) minimum beyond edge of excavation, with bituminous coating over entire surface. Cast cover with opening for manhole in center. 5. Manhole: 24 -inch- (610 -mm -) diameter, reinforced- concrete access lid with steel lift rings. Include bituminous coating over entire surface. 2.30 STORMWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEMS A. Chamber Systems: 1 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc. 1 b. Cultec, Inc. c. Hancor, Inc. 1 d. Infiltrator Systems, Inc. 2. Storage and Leaching Chambers: Molded PE with perforated sides and open bottom. Include number of chambers, distribution piping, end plates, and other standard components as required for system total capacity. 3. Filtering Material: ASTM D 448, Size No. 24, 3/4- to 2 -1/2 -inch (19- to 63 -mm) washed, crushed stone or gravel. 4. Filter Mat: Geotextile woven or spun filter fabric, in 1 or more layers, for minimum total unit weight of 4 oz. /sq. yd. (135 g/sq. m). 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 22 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 I Perforated manifold, header, and lateral piping complying B. Pipe Systems: p p g with AASHTO M 252M for NPS 10 (DN 250) and smaller, AASHTO M 294M for NPS 12 to ' NPS 48 (DN 250 to DN 1200), and AASHTO MP7 for NPS 54 and NPS 60 (DN 1350 and DN 1500). Include proprietary fittings, couplings, seals, and filter fabric. 111 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc. 1 b. Hancor, Inc. 2.31 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ' A. Paint: SSPC -Paint 16. ' B. PE Sheeting: ASTM D 4397, with at least 8 -mil (0.2 -mm) thickness or other equivalent, impervious material. 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 1 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 1 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Pipe couplings and special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. 1 1. Use nonpressure -type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure sewer piping, unless otherwise indicated. a. Unshielded or Shielded flexible or rigid couplings for same or minor difference OD pipes. b. Unshielded, increaser /reducer - pattem, flexible or rigid couplings for pipes with ' different OD. c. Ring -type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation. 1 2. Use pressure -type pipe couplings for force -main joints. B. Special Pipe Fittings: Use for pipe expansion and deflection. Pipe couplings and special pipe ' fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. ' C. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure Sewer Piping: Use any of the following pipe materials for each size range: 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 23 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1. NPS 3 i DN 80 : Hub -and -s of Extra-Heavy class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; ( ) Pg � �'Y � PP g gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. NPS 3 (DN 80): Hubless cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy -duty, cast -iron couplings; and coupled joints. 3. NPS 3 (DN 80): NPS 4 (DN 100) corrugated steel pipe and fittings, standard joint bands, and banded joints. ' 4. NPS 3 (DN 80): NPS 4 (DN 100) corrugated aluminum pipe and fittings, standard joint bands, and banded joints. 5. NPS 3 (DN 80): ABS, SDR 35, sewer pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 6. NPS 3 (DN 80): Corrugated PE drainage pipe and fittings, silttight couplings, and coupled joints. 7. NPS 3 (DN 80): PVC water- service pipe; PVC Schedule 40, water - service -pipe fittings; and solvent- cemented joints. 8. NPS 3 (DN 80): NPS 4 (DN 100) PVC sewer pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 9. NPS 3 (DN 80): NPS 4 (DN 100) Class [1] [2] [3], nonreinforced- concrete sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 10. NPS 4 to NPS 6 (DN 100 to DN 150): Hub -and- spigot, Extra -Heavy class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 11. NPS 4 to NPS 6 (DN 100 to DN 150): Hubless cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy - duty, cast -iron couplings; and coupled joints. 12. NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150): Corrugated steel pipe and fittings, standard - joint bands, and banded joints. 13. NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150): Corrugated aluminum pipe and fittings, standard joint bands, and banded joints. 14. NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150): ABS, SDR 35, sewer pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 15. NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150): Corrugated PE drainage pipe and fittings, silttight couplings, and coupled joints. 16. NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150): Cellular -core PVC pipe, PVC sewer pipe fittings, and solvent- cemented joints. 17. NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150): PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 18. NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150): Class 2, nonreinforced- concrete sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 19. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): Hub -and- spigot, Extra -Heavy class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 20. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): Hubless cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy- duty, cast -iron couplings; and coupled joints. 21. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): NPS 14 (DN 350) ductile -iron culvert pipe, ductile -iron standard or compact fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 22. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): Corrugated steel pipe and fittings, standard joint bands, and banded joints. 23. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): Corrugated aluminum pipe and fittings, standard joint bands, and banded joints. 24. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): ABS, SDR 42, sewer pipe and fittings; gaskets, and gasketed joints. 25. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): Corrugated PE drainage pipe and fittings in NPS 8 and NPS 10 (DN 200 and DN 250) and corrugated PE pipe and fittings in NPS 12 (DN 300), silttight couplings, and coupled joints. 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 24 1 MGA #053570 08/06 26. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): Cellular -core PVC pipe, PVC sewer pipe ' fittings, and solvent- cemented joints. 27. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 28. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): PVC profile gravity sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 29. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): Fiberglass Type 2 or 4, Class III, sewer RTRP, Type 1 or 2 RTRF, gaskets, and gasketed joints. ' 30. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): Nonreinforced- concrete sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 31. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): NPS 12 (DN 300) reinforced- concrete sewer ' pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 32. NPS 15 (DN 375): Hub - and - spigot, Extra -Heavy class, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 33. NPS 15 (DN 375): Hubless cast -iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy -duty, cast -iron couplings; and coupled joints. 34. NPS 15 (DN 375): NPS 16 (DN 400) ductile -iron culvert pipe, ductile -iron standard or compact fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 35. NPS 15 (DN 375): Corrugated steel pipe and fittings, standard joint bands, and banded joints. 36. NPS 15 (DN 375): Corrugated aluminum pipe and fittings, standard joint bands, and banded joints. 37. NPS 15 (DN 375): Corrugated PE pipe and fittings, silttight couplings, and coupled joints. ' 38. NPS 15 (DN 375): PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 39. NPS 15 (DN 375): PVC profile gravity sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 40. NPS 15 (DN 375): Fiberglass Type 2 or 4, Class III, sewer RTRP, Type 1 or 2 RTRF, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 41. NPS 15 (DN 375): Nonreinforced- concrete sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. ' 42. NPS 15 (DN 375): Reinforced- concrete sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 43. NPS 18 to NPS 36 (DN 450 to DN 900): Ductile -iron culvert pipe, ductile -iron ' standard[ or compact] fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 44. NPS 18 to NPS 36 (DN 450 to DN 900): Corrugated steel pipe and fittings, standard - joint bands, and banded joints. ' 45. NPS 18 to NPS 36 (DN 450 to DN 900): Corrugated aluminum pipe and fittings, [standard] [special] joint bands, and banded joints. 46. NPS 18 to NPS 36 (DN 450 to DN 900): Corrugated PE pipe and fittings, silttight couplings, and coupled joints. 1 47. NPS 18 to NPS 36 (DN 450 to DN 900): PVC sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 48. NPS 18 to NPS 36 (DN 450 to DN 900): PVC profile gravity sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 49. NPS 18 to NPS 36 (DN 450 to DN 900): Fiberglass Type 2 or 4, Class III, sewer RTRP, Type [1] [1 or 2] [2] RTRF, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 50. NPS 18 to NPS 36 (DN 450 to DN 900): Nonreinforced- concrete sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 51. NPS 18 to NPS 36 (DN 450 to DN 900): Reinforced- concrete sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 25 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 52. NPS 42 to NPS 64 DN 1050 to DN 1600): Ductile -iron culvert pipe, ( ) e PPS standard or compact fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 53. NPS 42 to NPS 64 (DN 1050 to DN 1600): Corrugated steel pipe and fittings, standard - joint bands, and banded joints. 54. NPS 42 to NPS 60 (DN 1050 to DN 1500): Corrugated aluminum pipe and fittings, standard joint bands, and banded joints. 55. NPS 42 to NPS 60 (DN 1050 to DN 1500): Corrugated PE pipe and fittings, silttight couplings, and coupled joints. 56. NPS 42 to NPS 60 (DN 1050 to DN 1500): Fiberglass Type 2 or 4, Class III, sewer RTRP, Type 1 or 2 RTRF, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 57. NPS 42 to NPS 60 (DN 1050 to DN 1500): Reinforced- concrete sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 58. NPS 66 to NPS 144 (DN 1650 to DN 3600): Corrugated steel pipe and fittings, standard - joint bands, and banded joints. 59. NPS 66 to NPS 120 (DN 1650 to DN 3000): Corrugated aluminum pipe and fittings, standard joint bands, and banded joints. 1 60. NPS 66 to NPS 144 (DN 1650 to DN 3600): Fiberglass Type 2 or 4, Class III, sewer RTRP, Type 1 or 2 RTRF, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 61. NPS 66 to NPS 144 (DN 1650 to DN 3600): Reinforced- concrete sewer pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. D. Force -Main Pressure Piping: Use any of the following pipe materials for each size range: 1. NPS 2 (DN 50): PVC Schedule 80, water - service pipe; PVC Schedule 80, water- service- pipe fittings; and solvent- cemented joints. 2. NPS 3 (DN 80): Ductile -iron pressure pipe; ductile -iron standard or compact fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 3. NPS 3 (DN 80): PVC Schedule 80, water - service pipe; PVC Schedule 80, water- service- pipe fittings; and solvent- cemented joints. 4. NPS 4 (DN 100): Ductile -iron pressure pipe; ductile -iron standard or compact fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 5. NPS 4 (DN 100): PVC pressure pipe, PVC pressure fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 6. NPS 6 to NPS 8 (DN 150 to DN 200): Ductile -iron pressure pipe; standard- or compact - pattern, ductile -iron fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 7. NPS 6 to NPS 8 (DN 150 to DN 200): PVC pressure pipe, PVC pressure fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 8. NPS 10 and NPS 12 (DN 250 and DN 300): Ductile -iron pressure pipe; standard- or compact - pattern, ductile -iron fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 9. NPS 10 and NPS 12 (DN 250 and DN 300): PVC pressure pipe; compact - pattern, ductile -iron fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions. 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 26 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, ' and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. ' D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited. E. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed by tunneling, 1 jacking, or a combination of both. F. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: ' 1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 2 percent, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger with restrained joints at tee fittings and at changes in direction. Use corrosion - resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint system, or cast -in -place concrete supports or anchors. ' 3. Install piping with 36 -inch (915 -mm) minimum cover. 4. Install piping below frost line. 5. Install hub - and - spigot, cast -iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook." 1 6. Install hubless cast -iron soil piping according to CISPI C310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook." 7. Install ductile -iron culvert piping according to ASTM A 716. ' 8. Install ductile -iron and special fittings according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41. 9. Install corrugated steel piping according to ASTM A 798/A 798M. 10. Install corrugated aluminum piping according to ASTM B 788/B 788M. ' 11. Install ABS sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 12. Install PE corrugated sewer piping according to CPPA's "Recommended Installation Practices for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings." 13. Install PVC cellular -core piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. ' 14. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 15. Install PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 16. Install fiberglass sewer piping according to ASTM D 3839 and ASTM F 1668. 1 17. Install nonreinforced- concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual." 18. Install reinforced - concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual." G. Install force -main pressure piping according to the following: 1 1. Install piping with restrained joints at tee fittings and at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use corrosion - resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint system, or cast -in -place concrete supports or anchors. ' 2. Install piping with 36 -inch (915 -mm) minimum cover. 3. Install piping below frost line. 4. Install ductile -iron pressure piping according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41. 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 27 1 MGA #053570 08/06 5. Install ductile -iron special fittings according to AWWA C600. P g g 6. Install PVC pressure piping according to AWWA M23 or ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 1668. 7. Install PVC water- service piping according to ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 1668. H. Install corrosion- protection piping encasement over the following underground metal piping 111 according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105: 1. Hub - and - spigot, cast -iron soil pipe and fittings. 2. Hubless cast -iron soil pipe and fittings. 3. Ductile -iron pipe and fittings. 4. Special pipe fittings. 3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Basic pipe joint construction is specified in Division 33 Section "Common Work Results for 1 Utilities." Where specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions. B. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: 1. Join hub -and- spigot, cast -iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints. 2. Join hub - and - spigot, cast -iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints. 3. Join hubless cast -iron soil piping according to CISPI C310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless - coupling joints. 4. Join ductile -iron culvert piping according to AWWA C600 for push -on joints. 5. Join ductile -iron and special fittings according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41. 6. Join corrugated steel sewer piping according to ASTM A 798/A 798M. 7. Join corrugated aluminum sewer piping according to ASTM B 788/B 788M. 8. Join ABS sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 2751 for elastomeric - seal joints. 9. Join corrugated PE piping according to CPPA 100 and the following: a. Use silttight couplings for Type 2, silttight joints. b. Use soiltight couplings for Type 1, soiltight joints. 10. Join PVC cellular -core piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 891 for solvent- 1 cement joints. 11. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric- seal joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric gasket joints. 12. Join PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 for elastomeric -seal joints or ASTM F 794 for gasketed joints. 13. Join fiberglass sewer piping according to ASTM D 3839 for elastomeric -seal joints. 14. Join nonreinforced- concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 14 (ASTM C 14M) and ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual" for rubber- gasket joints. 15. Join reinforced- concrete sewer piping according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual" for rubber- gasket joints. 16. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure -type flexible or rigid couplings. 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 28 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 C. Join force -main pressure piping according to the following: 1 1. Join ductile -iron pressure piping according to AWWA C660 or AWWA M41 for push -on joints. 2. Join ductile -iron special fittings according to AWWA C660 or AWWA M41 for push -on ' joints. 3. Join PVC pressure piping according to AWWA M23 for gasketed joints. 4. Join PVC water - service piping according to ASTM D 2855 for solvent- cemented joints. 1 D. Join dissimilar pipe materials with pressure -type couplings. 1 3.5 BACKWATER VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install horizontal -type backwater valves in piping where indicated. B. Install combination horizontal and manual gate valve type in piping and in manholes where indicated. 1 C. Install terminal -type backwater valves on end of piping and in manholes where indicated. 1 3.6 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. Install cleanouts and riser extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade. Use cast -iron soil ' pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast -iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe. ' 1. Use light -duty, top - loading classification cleanouts in earth or unpaved foot -traffic areas. 2. Use medium -duty, top - loading classification cleanouts in paved foot -traffic areas. 3. Use heavy -duty, top - loading classification cleanouts in vehicle -traffic service areas. 4. Use extra -heavy -duty, top - loading classification cleanouts in roads areas. ' B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast -in -place concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches (450 by 450 by 300 mm) deep. Set with tops 1 inch (25 mm) above surrounding earth grade. C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface. 1 3.7 DRAIN INSTALLATION A. Install type of drains in locations indicated. ' 1. Use light -duty, top - loading classification drains in earth or unpaved foot -traffic areas. 2. Use medium -duty, top - loading classification drains in paved foot -traffic areas. 3. Use heavy -duty, top - loading classification drains in vehicle -traffic service areas. 4. Use extra -heavy -duty, top - loading classification drains in roads areas. ' B. Embed drains in 4 -inch (102 -mm) minimum depth of concrete around bottom and sides. C. Fasten grates to drains if indicated. 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 29 1 MGA #053570 08/06 D. Set drain frames and covers with P tops flush with pavement surface. E. Assemble trench sections with flanged joints. 1 F. Embed trench sections in 4 -inch (102 -mm) minimum concrete around bottom and sides. 1 3.8 MANHOLE INSTALLATION A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated. 1 B. Install precast concrete manhole sections according to ASTM C 891. C. Construct cast -in -place manholes as indicated. D. Install PE sheeting on earth where cast -in- place- concrete manholes are to be built. E. Install FRP manholes according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. 1 Set tops 3 inches (76 mm) above finished surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated. 3.9 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated. B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated. 3.10 STORMWATER INLET AND OUTLET INSTALLATION A. Construct inlet head walls, aprons, and sides of reinforced concrete, as indicated. B. Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated. C. Install outlets that spill onto grade, anchored with concrete, where indicated. 1 D. Install outlets that spill onto grade, with flared end sections that match pipe, where indicated. E. Construct energy dissipaters at outlets, as indicated. 3.11 DRY WELL INSTALLATION 1 A. Excavate hole to diameter of at least 6 inches (150 mm) greater than outside of dry well. Do not 1 extend excavation into ground -water table. B. Install precast, concrete -ring dry wells according to the following: 1. Assemble rings to depth indicated. 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 30 1 MGA #053570 08/06 Extend rings to height where top of cover will be approximately 8 inches (203 mm 2. Exte g gh p pp Y ( mm) below finished grade. ' 3. Backfill bottom of inside of rings with filtering material to level at least 12 inches (300 mm) above bottom. 4. Extend effluent inlet pipe 12 inches (300 mm) into rings and terminate into side of tee 1 fitting. 5. Backfill around outside of rings with filtering material to top level of rings. 6. Install cover over top of rings. 1 C. Install manufactured, PE dry wells according to manufacturer's written instructions and the following: 1 1. Assemble and install panels and cover. 2. Backfill bottom of inside of unit with filtering material to level at least 12 inches (300 mm) above bottom. 1 3. Extend effluent inlet pipe 12 inches (300 mm) into unit and terminate into side of tee fitting. 4. Install filter fabric around outside of unit. 1 5. Install filtering material around outside of unit. D. Install constructed -in -place dry wells according to the following: 1 1. Install brick lining material dry and laid flat, with staggered joints for seepage. Build to diameter and depth indicated. 2. Install block lining material dry, with staggered joints and 20 percent minimum of blocks 1 on side for seepage. Install precast concrete rings with notches or weep holes for seepage. Build to diameter and depth indicated. 3. Extend lining material to height where top of manhole will be approximately 8 inches 1 (203 mm) below finished grade. 4. Backfill bottom of inside of lining with filtering material to level at least 12 inches (300 mm) above bottom. ' 5. Extend effluent inlet pipe 12 inches (300 mm) into lining and terminate into side of tee fitting. 6. Backfill around outside of lining with filtering material to top level of lining. 7. Install manhole over top of dry well. Support cover on undisturbed soil. Do not support 1 cover on lining. 1 3.12 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Place cast -in -place concrete according to ACI 318/318R. 1 3.13 DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION 1 A. Assemble and install components according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with finished surface. 1 C. Assemble channel sections to form slope down toward drain outlets. Use sealants, adhesives, fasteners, and other materials recommended by system manufacturer. 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 31 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 D. Embed channel sections and drainage specialties in 4 -inch (102-mm) minimum concrete around g P ( ) bottom and sides. E. Fasten grates to channel sections if indicated. F. Assemble channel sections with flanged or interlocking joints. G. Embed channel sections in 4 -inch (102 -mm) minimum concrete around bottom and sides. 3.14 STORMWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Chamber Systems: Excavate trenches of width and depth, and install system and backfill according to chamber manufacturer's written instructions. Include storage and leaching chambers, filtering material, and filter mat. B. Piping Systems: Excavate trenches of width and depth, and install piping system, filter fabric, 1 and backfill according to piping manufacturer's written instructions. 3.15 CONNECTIONS A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping in building's storm building drains specified in Division 22 Section "Facility Storm Drainage Piping." B. Connect force -main pressure piping to building's storm drainage force mains specified in Division 22 Section "Facility Storm Drainage Piping." Terminate piping where indicated. 1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting, plus 6 -inch (150 -mm) overlap, with not less than 6 inches (150 mm) of concrete with 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa). 2. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20 (DN 100 to DN 500). Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye with not less than 6 inches (150 mm) of concrete with 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa). 3. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 21 (DN 525) or larger, or to underground manholes and structures by cutting opening into existing unit large enough to allow 3 inches (76 mm) of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall, unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe, manhole, or structure wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches (150 mm) of concrete for minimum length of 12 inches (300 mm) to provide additional support of collar from connection to undisturbed ground. a. Use concrete that will attain a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa), unless otherwise indicated. b. Use epoxy - bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and piping materials. 1 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 32 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 4. Protect existing piping, manholes, and structures to prevent concrete or debris from 1 entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate. C. Connect to sediment interceptors specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste 1 Interceptors." 3.16 CLOSING ABANDONED STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in 1 place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below: 1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8 -inch- (203 -mm- )thick, brick masonry ' bulkheads. 2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs. 1 B. Abandoned Manholes and Structures: Excavate around manholes and structures as required and use one procedure below: 1 1. Remove manhole or structure and close open ends of remaining piping. 2. Remove top of manhole or structure down to at least 36 inches (915 mm) below final grade. Fill to within 12 inches (300 mm) of top with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted 1 dirt. Fill to top with concrete. C. Backfill to grade according to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 1 3.17 PAINTING 1 A. Clean and prepare concrete manhole surfaces for field painting. Remove loose efflorescence, chalk, dust, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen surface as required to remove glaze. Paint the following concrete surfaces as recommended by paint manufacturer: 1 1. Cast -in- Place- Concrete Manholes: All exterior, except bottom and all interior. 2. Precast Concrete Manholes: All exterior and interior. B. Prepare ferrous frame and cover surfaces according to SSPC -PA 1 and paint according to SSPC -PA 1 and SSPC -Paint 16. Do not paint surfaces with foundry- applied, corrosion - resistant ' coating. 3.18 IDENTIFICATION 1 A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Arrange for installation of green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground 1 structures. 1. Use warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 33 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground g P PP g g � structures. 3.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. 1 Inspect after approximately 24 inches (610 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. 1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following: a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping. 3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. 1 4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory. B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects. 1 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test. 5. Gravity -Flow Storm Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, UNI -B -6, and the following: a. Exception: Piping with soiltight joints unless required by authorities having jurisdiction. b. Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417. c. Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C 924 (ASTM C 924M). 6. Force -Main Storm Drainage Piping: Perform hydrostatic test after thrust blocks, supports, and anchors have hardened. Test at pressure not less than 1 -1/2 times the 1 maximum system operating pressure, but not less than 150 prig (1035 kPa). a. Ductile -Iron Piping: Test according to AWWA C600, "Hydraulic Testing" Section. b. PVC Piping: Test according to AWWA M23, "Testing and Maintenance" Chapter. C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 34 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within i allowances specified. 3.20 CLEANING 1 A. Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous materials. Flush with potable water. 1 END OF SECTION 334100 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 35 i 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 SECTION 334600 - SUBDRAINAGE 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes subdrainage systems for the following: 1. Foundations. 2. Underslab areas. 3. Plaza decks. 4. Retaining walls. 5. Landscaped areas. ' B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 07 waterproofing Sections for molded -sheet drainage panels. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ABS: Acrylonitrile- butadiene - styrene plastic. 1 B. HDPE: High- density polyethylene plastic. C. PE: Polyethylene plastic. D. PP: Polypropylene plastic. ' E. PS: Polystyrene plastic. F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. G. Subdrainage: Drainage system that collects and removes subsurface or seepage water. ' 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1 1. Perforated -wall pipe and fittings. 2. Solid -wall pipe and fittings. 3. Drainage conduits. 1 SUBDRAINAGE 334600 - 1 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 4. Drainage panels. 5. Geotextile filter fabrics. B. Approval of waterproofing manufacturer's service agent for use of drainage panels against and for waterproofing membrane protection. 1 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS 1 A. Refer to the "Piping Applications" Article in Part 3 for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. 2.3 PERFORATED -WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS A. Perforated PE Pipe and Fittings: 1. NPS 6 (DN 150) and Smaller: ASTM F 405 or AASHTO M 252, Type CP; corrugated, for coupled joints. 2. NPS 8 (DN 200) and Larger: ASTM F 667; AASHTO M 252, Type CP; or AASHTO M 294, Type CP; corrugated; for coupled joints. 3. Couplings: Manufacturer's standard, band type. B. Perforated PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2729, bell -and- spigot ends, for loose joints. C. Perforated Clay Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 700, Standard- and Extra - Strength classes, unglazed, socket - and - spigot ends, for gasketed joints. 1. Gaskets: ASTM C 425, rubber. D. Perforated Concrete Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 444 (ASTM C 444M), Type 1, and applicable requirements in ASTM C 14 (ASTM C 14M), Class 2, socket -and- spigot ends for gasketed joints. 1. Gaskets: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. 1 SUBDRAINAGE 334600 - 2 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 ' 2.4 SOLID-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS 1 A. ABS Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2751. 1. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235. 2. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. B. Cast -Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service and Extra -Heavy classes, hub -and- spigot ' ends, gray, for gasketed joints. 1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber, of thickness matching class of pipe. 1 C. PE Drainage Tubing and Fittings: AASHTO M 252, Type S, corrugated, with smooth waterway, for coupled joints. 1. Couplings: AASHTO M 252, corrugated, band type, matching tubing and fittings. D. PE Pipe and Fittings: AASHTO M 294, Type S, corrugated, with smooth waterway, for ' coupled joints. 1. Couplings: AASHTO M 294, corrugated, band type, matching tubing and fittings. 1 E. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, bell- and - spigot ends, for gasketed joints. 1 1. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. ' 2.5 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve -type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion- resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Sleeve Materials: ' a. For Concrete Pipes: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. b. For Cast -Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. ' c. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. d. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined. 1 2. Unshielded Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric sleeve with stainless -steel shear ring and corrosion- resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 3. Shielded Flexible Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full- length, corrosion - resistant outer shield and corrosion - resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1 1 SUBDRAINAGE 334600 - 3 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 2.6 CLEANOUTS A. Cast -Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M; with round - flanged, cast -iron housing; and secured, scoriated, Medium -Duty Loading class, cast -iron cover. Include cast -iron ferrule and countersunk, brass cleanout plug. B. Copper -Alloy Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M; with round - flanged, cast -iron housing with 1 clamping device; and scoriated, Light -Duty Loading class, copper -alloy cover. Include countersunk, brass cleanout plug. C. PVC Cleanouts: ASTM D 3034, PVC cleanout threaded plug and threaded pipe hub. 2.7 DRAINAGE CONDUITS A. Molded -Sheet Drainage Conduits: Prefabricated geocomposite with cuspated, molded - plastic drainage core wrapped in geotextile filter fabric. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. American Wick Drain Corporation. b. JDR Enterprises, Inc. c. TC Mirafi. 1 2. Nominal Size: 12 inches (305 mm) high by approximately 1 inch (25 mm) thick. a. Minimum In -Plane Flow: 30 gpm (114 L /min.) at hydraulic gradient of 1.0 when 1 tested according to ASTM D 4716. 3. Nominal Size: 18 inches (457 mm) high by approximately 1 inch (25 mm) thick. 1 a. Minimum In -Plane Flow: 45 gpm (170 L /min.) at hydraulic gradient of 1.0 when tested according to ASTM D 4716. 1 4. Filter Fabric: PP geotextile. 5. Fittings: HDPE with combination NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150) outlet connection. B. Multipipe Drainage Conduits: Prefabricated geocomposite with interconnected, corrugated, perforated -pipe core molded from HDPE complying with ASTM D 1248 and wrapped in geotextile filter fabric. 1. Available Manufacturers: 1 a. Varicore Technologies, Inc. 2. Nominal Size: 6 inches (152 mm) high by approximately 1 -1/4 inches (31 mrn) thick. 1 a. Minimum In -Plane Flow: 15 gpm (57 L /min.) at hydraulic gradient of 1.0 when 1 tested according to ASTM D 4716. 1 SUBDRAINAGE 334600 - 4 1 MGA #053570 08/06 3. Nominal Size: 12 inches (305 mm) high by approximately 1 -1/4 inches (31 mm) thick. a. Minimum In -Plane Flow: 30 gpm (114 L /min.) at hydraulic gradient of 1.0 when tested according to ASTM D 4716. 1 4. Nominal Size: 18 inches (457 nun) high by approximately 1 -1/4 inches (31 mm) thick. a. Minimum In -Plane Flow: 45 gpm (170 L /min.) at hydraulic gradient of 1.0 when ' tested according to ASTM D 4716. 5. Filter Fabric: Nonwoven, needle- punched geotextile. 6. Fittings: HDPE with combination NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150) outlet ' connection. 7. Couplings: HDPE. ' C. Single -Pipe Drainage Conduits: Prefabricated geocomposite with perforated corrugated core molded from HDPE complying with ASTM D 3350 and wrapped in geotextile filter fabric. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Advanced Drainage Systems. 1 2. Nominal Size: 12 inches (305 mm) high by approximately 1 inch (25 mm) thick. a. Minimum In -Plane Flow: 30 gpm (114 L /min.) at hydraulic gradient of 1.0 when 1 tested according to ASTM D 4716. 3. Nominal Size: 18 inches (457 mm) high by approximately 1 inch (25 mm) thick. 1 a. Minimum In -Plane Flow: 45 gpm (170 L /min.) at hydraulic gradient of 1.0 when tested according to ASTM D 4716. 1 4. Filter Fabric: Nonwoven, PP geotextile. 5. Fittings: HDPE with combination NPS 4 and NPS 6 (DN 100 and DN 150) outlet connection. 1 6. Couplings: Corrugated HDPE band. D. Mesh Fabric Drainage Conduits: Prefabricated geocomposite with plastic - filament drainage ' core wrapped in geotextile filter fabric. Include fittings for bends and connection to drainage piping. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Colbond Geosynthetics. 1 2. Nominal Size: 6 inches (2 -mm) high by approximately 0.9 inch (23 mrn) thick. a. Minimum In -Plane Flow: 2.4 gpm (9.1 L /min.) at hydraulic gradient of 1.0when tested according to ASTM D 4716. 1 SUBDRAINAGE 334600 - 5 1 MGA #053570 08/06 3. Filter Fabric: Nonwoven eotextile made of PP or polyester fibers or combination of g P Y both. Flow rates range from 120 to 200 gpm/sq. ft. (81 to 136 L/s per sq. m) when tested according to ASTM D 4491. E. Ring Fabric Drainage Conduits: Drainage conduit with HDPE - rings -in- grid - pattern drainage core, for field- applied geotextile filter fabric. Include fittings for bends and connection to drainage piping. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Invisible Structures, Inc. 2. Nominal Size: 0.5 m high by 1 inch (25 mm) thick. 1 a. Minimum In -Plane Flow: 82 gpm (310 L /min.) at hydraulic gradient of 1.0when tested according to ASTM D 4716. 3. Nominal Size: 1 m high by 1 inch (25 mm) thick. a. Minimum In -Plane Flow: 164 gpm (621 L /min.) at hydraulic gradient of 1.0when 1 tested according to ASTM D 4716. 4. Filter Fabric: Specified in Part 2 "Geotextile Filter Fabrics" Article. 1 2.8 DRAINAGE PANELS A. Molded -Sheet Drainage Panels: Prefabricated geocomposite, 36 to 60 inches (915 to 1525 mm) wide with drainage core faced with geotextile filter fabric. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. American Wick Drain Corporation. b. Cosella - Dorken. c. Eljen Corp. d. Greenstreak, Inc. e. JDR Enterprises, Inc. f. L1NQ Industrial Fabrics, Inc. g. Midwest Diversified Technologies Incorporated. h. TC Mirafi. 1 2. Drainage Core: Three - dimensional, nonbiodegradable, molded PP or PS. a. Minimum Compressive Strength: 10,000 lbf/sq. ft. (479 kPa) when tested according to ASTM D 1621. b. Minimum In -Plane Flow Rate: 2.8 gpm/ft. (35 L /min. per m) of unit width at hydraulic gradient of 1.0 and compressive stress of 25 psig (172 kPa) when tested according to ASTM D 4716. 3. Filter Fabric: Nonwoven needle - punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface 1 drainage, made from polyolefms or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with the following properties determined according to AASHTO M 288: SUBDRAINAGE 334600 - 6 1 MGA #053570 08/06 a. Survivability: Class 1. b. Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 (0.425 -mm) sieve, maximum. 1 c. Permittivity: 0.1 per second, minimum. 4. Filter Fabric: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for subsurface drainage, made from ' polyolefms or polyesters; with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with the following properties determined according to AASHTO M 288: ' a. Survivability: Class 3. b. Apparent Opening Size: No. 30 (0.6 -mm) sieve, maximum. c. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum. 1 5. Film Backing: Polymeric film bonded to drainage core surface. B. Mesh Fabric Drainage Panels: Prefabricated geocomposite with drainage core faced with 1 geotextile filter fabric. 1. Available Manufacturers: 1 a. Colbond Geosynthetics. 2. Drainage Core: Open- construction, resilient, approximately 0.4 -inch- (10.2 -mm -) thick, plastic - filament mesh. a. Minimum In -Plane Flow Rate: 2.4 gpm/ft. (30 L /min. per m) of unit width at ' hydraulic gradient of 1.0 and normal pressure of 25 psig (172 kPa) when tested according to ASTM D 4716. ' 3. Filter Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both. Flow rates range from 120 to 200 gpm/sq. ft. (81 to 136 L/s per sq. m) when tested according to ASTM D 4491. 1 C. Net Fabric Drainage Panels: Prefabricated geocomposite with drainage core faced with geotextile filter fabric. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. GSE Lining Technology, Inc. b. JDR Enterprises, Inc. c. Strata Systems, Inc. 2. Drainage Core: 3- dimensional, PE nonwoven -strand geonet, approximately 0.25 -inch- ' (6 -mm -) thick. a. Minimum In -Plane Flow Rate: 2.4 gpm/ft. (30 L /min. per m) of unit width at ' hydraulic gradient of [1.0] <Insert value> and normal pressure of 25 psig (172 kPa) when tested according to ASTM D 4716. ' 3. Filter Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both. Flow rates range from 120 to 200 gpm/sq. ft. (81 to 136 L/s per sq. m) when tested according to ASTM D 4491. 1 SUBDRAINAGE 334600 - 7 1 MGA #053570 08/06 D. Ring Fabric Drainage Panels: Drainage-core panel for field application of geotextile filter g g g P PP g fabric. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Invisible Structures, Inc. 2. Drainage Core: 3- dimensional, HDPE rings in grid pattern, approximately 0.1 inch (25 mm) thick. a. Minimum In -Plane Flow Rate: 50 gpm/ft. (625 L /min. per m) of unit width at hydraulic gradient of 1.0 and normal pressure of 25 psig (172 kPa) when tested according to ASTM D 4716. 1 E. Fabric - Covered Insulated Drainage Panels: Extruded PS board insulation complying with ASTM C 578; fabricated with shiplap or tongue - and - groove edges and with one side having grooved drainage channels; =faced; faced with geotextile filter fabric]. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Dow Chemical Company (The). b. Owens Coming. c. T. Clear Corporation. 1 2. Type IV, 1.6- lb /cu. ft. (26- kg/cu. m) minimum density and 25 -psig (172 -kPa) minimum compressive strength. 3. Type VI, 1.84b/cu. ft. (29- kg/cu. m) minimum density and 40-psig (276 -kPa) minimum compressive strength. 4. Minimum In -Plane Flow Rate: 9 gpm/ft. (112 L /min. per m) of unit width when tested according to ASTM D 4716. 5. Filter Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both. Flow rates range from 120 to 200 gpm/sq. ft. (81 to 136 L/s per sq. m) when tested according to ASTM D 4491. F. Noncovered Insulated Drainage Panels: Extruded PS board insulation complying with ASTM C 578; fabricated with rabbeted edges and with one side having ribbed drainage channels. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Dow Chemical Company (The). b. Owens Coming. 2. Type VI, 1.8- lb /cu. ft. (29- kg/cu. m) minimum density and 40-psig (276 -kPa) minimum compressive strength. 3. Type VII, 2.2- lb /cu. ft. (35- kg/cu. m) minimum density and 60 -psig (414 -kPa) minimum compressive strength. 4. Minimum In -Plane Flow Rate: 9 gpm/ft. (112 L /min. per m) of unit width when tested according to ASTM D 4716. 1 SUBDRAINAGE 334600 - 8 1 MGA #053570 08/06 d PS Insulated Drainage Panels: PS bead board insulation; panels (102 are 4 inches G. Expanded g , p ( mm) thick by 48 inches (1220 mm) wide and faced with geotextile filter fabric. ' 1. Available Manufacturers: 1 a. GeoTech Systems Corporation. 2. Density: 2 lb/cu. ft. (32 kg/cu. m). ' 3. Compressive Strength: 800 lbf/sq. ft. (38 kPa). 4. Minimum In -Plane Flow Rate: 3 gpm/ft. (37 L /min. per m) of unit width when tested according to ASTM D 4716. 5. Filter Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both. Flow rates range from 120 to 200 gpm/sq. ft. (81 to 136 L/s per sq. m) when tested according to ASTM D 4491. 2.9 SOIL MATERIALS A. Backfill, drainage course, impervious fill, and satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 1 2.10 ROOFING FELTS A. ASTM D 226, Type I, asphalt or ASTM D 227, coal - tar - saturated roofing felt. 2.11 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS 1 A. Description: Fabric of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both, with flow rate range from 110 to 330 gpm/sq. ft. (4480 to 13 440 L /min. per sq. m) when tested according to ASTM D 4491. 1. Structure Type: Nonwoven, needle - punched continuous filament or woven, monofilament or multifilament]. 1 2. Style(s): Flat and sock. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 1 A. Examine surfaces and areas for suitable conditions where subdrainage systems are to be installed. 1 B. If subdrainage is required for landscaping, locate and mark existing utilities, underground structures, and aboveground obstructions before beginning installation and avoid disruption and damage of services. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1 SUBDRAINAGE 334600 - 9 1 MGA #053570 08/06 3.2 EARTHWORK A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 1 3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Underground Subdrainage Piping: 1. Perforated PE pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 1 2. Perforated PVC sewer pipe and fittings for loose, bell- and - spigot joints. 3. Perforated clay pipe and fittings, Standard - Strength class; gaskets; and gasketed joints. B. Underslab Subdrainage Piping: 1. Perforated PE pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 2. Perforated PVC sewer pipe and fittings and loose, bell- and - spigot joints. 3. Perforated clay pipe and fittings, Extra - Strength class; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 4. Perforated concrete pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. C. Header Piping: 1. ABS pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed and solvent- cemented joints. 2. Cast -iron soil pipe and fittings, Extra -Heavy class; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 3. PE drainage tubing and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 4. PVC sewer pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints. 3.4 CLEANOUT APPLICATIONS A. In Underground Subdrainage Piping: 1. At Grade in Earth: PVC cleanouts. 2. At Grade in Paved Areas: Cast -iron cleanouts. B. In Underslab Subdrainage Piping: 1. In Equipment Rooms and Unfinished Areas: Cast -iron cleanouts. 2. In Finished Areas: Copper -alloy cleanouts. 3.5 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE INSTALLATION A. Place impervious fill material on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing after concrete footing 1 forms have been removed. Place and compact impervious fill to dimensions indicated, but not less than 6 inches (150 mm) deep and 12 inches (300 mm) wide. B. Place impervious fill on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing and compact to dimensions indicated, but not less than 6 inches (150 mm) deep and 12 inches (300 mm) wide after concrete 1 footing forms have been removed. C. Lay flat -style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides. SUBDRAINAGE 334600 - 10 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 supporting layer of drainage course over compacted sub grade and geotextile filter fabric, D. Place aces pp g y g p gl' g to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches (100 mm). ' E. Encase pipe with sock -style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections with adhesive or tape. ' F. Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for foundation subdrainage. 1 G. Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side away from wall and to top of pipe to perform tests. 1 H. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side away from footing and above top of pipe to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finish grade. 1 I. Install drainage course and wrap top of drainage course with flat -style geotextile filter fabric. J. Place layer of flat -style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage course, overlapping edges at ' least 4 inches (100 mm). K. Install vertical drainage panels as follows: 1 1. Coordinate placement with other drainage materials. 2. Lay perforated drainage pipe at base of footing. Install as indicated m Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article. Do not install aggregate. ' 3. Separate 4 inches (100 mm) of fabric at beginning of roll and cut away 4 inches (100 mm) of core. Wrap fabric around end of remaining core. 4. Wrap bottom of panel around drainage pipe. ' 5. Attach panel to wall at horizontal mark and at beginning of pipe. Place core side of panel against wall. Use concrete nails with washers through product cylinders to attach panel to wall. Place nails from 2 to 6 inches (50 to 150 mm) below top of panel, approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) apart. Construction adhesives, metal stick pins, ordouble- double - sided tape may be used instead of nails. Do not penetrate waterproofing. Before using adhesives, discuss with waterproofing manufacturer. 6. If additional panels are required on same row, cut away 4 inches (100 mm) of installed ' panel core, install new panel against installed panel, and overlap new panel with installed panel fabric. 7. If additional rows of panels are required, overlap lower panel with 4 inches (100 mm) of ' fabric. 8. Cut panel as necessary to keep top 12 inches (300 mm) below fmish grade. 9. For inside corners, bend panel. For outside comers, cut core to provide 3 inches (75 mm) ' for overlap. L. Do not use drainage panels as protection for waterproof membrane unless approved by factory- authorized service representative of waterproofmg membrane manufacturer. Submit approval if 1 so used. M. Place initial backfill material over compacted drainage course . Place material in loose -depth ' layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm). Thoroughly compact each layer. Final backfill to fmish elevations and slope away from building. 1 SUBDRAINAGE 334600 - 11 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 3.6 UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE INSTALLATION A. Excavate for underslab drainage system after subgrade material has been compacted but before drainage course has been placed. Include horizontal distance of at least 6 inches (150 mm) between drainage pipe and trench walls. Grade bottom of trench excavations to required slope, and compact to firm, solid bed for drainage system. 1 B. Lay flat -style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides. C. Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile filter fabric, 1 to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches (100 mm). D. Encase pipe with sock -style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections with adhesive or tape. E. Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for underslab subdrainage. F. Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side away from wall and to top 1 of pipe to perform tests. G. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping with drainage course to elevation of bottom of slab, and compact and wrap top of drainage course with flat -style geotextile filter fabric. 1 H. Install horizontal drainage panels as follows: 1. Coordinate placement with other drainage materials. 1 2. Lay perforated drainage pipe at inside edge of footings. 3. Place drainage panel over drainage pipe with core side up. Peel back fabric and wrap fabric around pipe. Locate top of core at bottom elevation of floor slab. 4. Butt additional panels against other installed panels. If panels have plastic flanges, overlap installed panel with flange. 3.7 PLAZA DECK DRAINAGE INSTALLATION A. Horizontal Drainage Panel: Install between slab and floor cover. Place core on structural floor. 1 Install panels to fit tightly around floor drains of building's storm drainage system. Provide stormwater access into floor drain. 1. Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for plaza deck subdrainage. B. See Division 32 Section "Unit Paving." 3.8 RETAINING -WALL DRAINAGE INSTALLATION A. Lay flat -style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides. B. Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches (100 mm). 1 SUBDRAINAGE 334600 - 12 1 1 MGA #053570 08/06 C. Encase pipe with sock -style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections ' with adhesive or tape. D. Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for retaining -wall subdrainage. ' E. Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side away from wall and to top of pipe to perform tests. 1 F. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side away from footing and above top of pipe to within 12 inches (300 mm) of fmish grade. G. Place drainage course in layers not exceeding 3 inches (75 mm) in loose depth; compact each layer placed and wrap top of drainage course with flat -style geotextile filter fabric. ' H. Place layer of flat -style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage course, overlapping edges at least 4 inches (100 mm). I. Install vertical drainage panels as follows: 1. Coordinate placement with other drainage materials. 2. Lay perforated drainage pipe at base of footing as described elsewhere in this ' Specification. Do not install aggregate. 3. If weep holes are used instead of drainage pipe, cut 1/2 -inch- (13 -nun -) diameter holes on core side at weep -hole locations. Do not cut fabric. ' 4. Mark horizontal calk line on wall at a point 6 inches (150 mm) less than panel width above footing bottom. Before marking wall, subtract footing width. 5. Separate 4 inches (100 mm) of fabric at beginning of roll and cut away 4 inches (100 ' nun) of core. Wrap fabric around end of remaining core. 6. Wrap bottom of panel around drainage pipe. 7. Attach panel to wall at horizontal mark and at beginning of wall comer. Place core side of panel against wall. Use concrete nails with washers through product. Place nails from 2 to 6 inches (50 to 150 mm) below top of panel, approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) apart. Construction adhesives, metal stick pins, or double -sided tape may be used instead of nails. Do not penetrate waterproofing. Before using adhesives, discuss with waterproofing manufacturer. 8. If another panel is required on same row, cut away 4 inches (100 mm) of installed panel core and wrap fabric over new panel. 9. If additional rows of panel are required, overlap lower panel with 4 inches (100 mm) of fabric. 10. Cut panel as necessary to keep top 12 inches (300 mm) below fmish grade. ' 11. For inside comers, bend panel. For outside corners, cut core to provide 3 inches (75 mm) for overlap. 12. Do not use drainage panels as protection for waterproof membrane unless approved by 1 factory- authorized service representative of waterproofing membrane manufacturer. Submit approval if so used. J. Fill to Grade: Place satisfactory soil fill material over compacted drainage course . Place ' material in loose -depth layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm). Thoroughly compact each layer. Fill to fmish grade. 1 SUBDRAINAGE 334600 - 13 1 MGA #053570 08/06 3.9 LANDSCAPING DRAINAGE INSTALLATION 111 A. Provide trench width to allow installation of drainage conduit. Grade bottom of trench excavations to required slope, and compact to firm, solid bed for drainage system. B. Lay flat -style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides. C. Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile filter fabric, to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches (100 mm). D. Install drainage conduits as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for landscaping subdrainage with horizontal distance of at least 6 inches (150 mm) between conduit and trench walls. Wrap drainage conduits without integral geotextile filter fabric with flat -style geotextile 1 filter fabric before installation. Connect fabric sections with adhesive or tape. E. Add drainage course to top of drainage conduits. 1 F. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage conduit to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finish grade. G. Install drainage course and wrap top of drainage course with flat -style geotextile filter fabric. 1 H. Place layer of flat -style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage course, overlapping edges at least 4 inches (100 mm). 1 I. Fill to Grade: Place satisfactory soil fill material over drainage course. Place material in loose - depth layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm). Thoroughly compact each layer. Fill to finish grade. 3.10 PIPING INSTALLATION 1 A. Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions and other requirements indicated. 1. Foundation Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum 1 slope of 0.5 percent and with a minimum cover of 36 inches (915 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Underslab Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5 percent. 3. Plaza Deck Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 1.0 percent. 4. Retaining -Wall Subdrainage: When water discharges at end of wall into stormwater piping system, install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5 percent and with a minimum cover of 36 inches (915 mm), unless otherwise indicated. However, when water discharges through wall weep holes, pipe may be installed with a minimum slope of zero percent. 5. Landscaping Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5 percent and with a minimum cover of 36 inches (915 mm), unless otherwise indicated. 1 SUBDRAINAGE 334600 - 14 1 MGA #053570 08/06 6. Lay perforated pipe with perforations down. 7. Excavate recesses in trench bottom for bell ends of pipe. Lay pipe with bells facing 1 upslope and with spigot end entered fully into adjacent bell. B. Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes and 1 fittings being connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited. C. Install ABS piping according to ASTM D 2321. 1 D. Install PE piping according to ASTM D 2321. E. Install PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321. F. Install clay piping according to ASTM C 12 and NCPI's "Clay Pipe Engineering Manual." 1 G. Install concrete piping according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Handbook." ' 3.11 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Cast -Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: Hub and spigot, with rubber compression gaskets according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook." Use gaskets that match class of pipe and 1 fittings. B. Join ABS pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 2751. C. Join PE pipe, tubing, and fittings with couplings for soil -tight joints according to AASHTO's "Standard Specifications . for Highway Bridges," Division II, Section 26.4.2.4, "Joint ' Properties." D. Join perforated, PE pipe and fittings with couplings for soil -tight joints according to AASHTO's "Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges," Division II, Section 26.4.2.4, "Joint 1 Properties "; or according to ASTM D 2321. E. Join PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 3034 with elastomeric seal gaskets according ' to ASTM D 2321. F. Join perforated PVC pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 2729, with loose bell- and - spigot joints. G. Join perforated clay pipe and fittings with gaskets according to ASTM C 425. H. Join perforated concrete pipe and fittings with gaskets according to ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M). I. Special Pipe Couplings: Join piping made of different materials and dimensions with special couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and fit materials and dimensions of both pipes. 1 SUBDRAINAGE 334600 - 15 1 MGA #053570 08/06 3.12 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. Cleanouts for Foundation; Retaining -Wall; and Landscaping Subdrainage: ' 1. Install cleanouts from piping to grade. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run and at changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping. 2. In vehicular- traffic areas, use NPS 4 (DN 100) cast -iron soil pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast - in -place concrete anchor, 18 by 18 by 12 inches (450 by 450 by 300 mm) in depth. Set top of cleanout flush with grade. Cast -iron pipe may also be used for cleanouts in nonvehicular- traffic areas. 3. In nonvehicular- traffic areas, use NPS 4 (DN 100) PVC pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast - in -place concrete anchor, 12 by 12 by 4 inches (300 by 300 by 100 mm) in depth. Set top of cleanout plug 1 inch (25 mm) above grade. B. Cleanouts for Underslab Subdrainage: 1. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from piping to top of slab. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run and at changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping. 2. Use NPS 4 (DN 100) cast -iron soil pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout flush with top of slab. 3.13 CONNECTIONS 1 A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect low elevations of subdrainage system to building's solid- wall - piping storm drainage system. C. Where required, connect low elevations of foundation; underslab subdrainage to stormwater 1 sump pumps. 3.14 IDENTIFICATION A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Arrange 111 for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping. 1. Install PE warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 2. Install detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground ' structures. 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: After installing drainage course to top of piping, test drain piping with water to ensure free flow before backfilling. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results are satisfactory. 1 SUBDRAINAGE 334600 - 16 1 MGA #053570 08/06 1 3.16 CLEANING 1 A. Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs m ends of uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work stops. 1 END OF SECTION 334600 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SUBDRAINAGE 334600 - 17 1